Contents

Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 500
1 of 500

Summary of Content for Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual PDF

2020 KICKS OWNERS MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un- derstand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Book- let explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The Maintenance and schedules section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re- solve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights un- der your state's lemon law. When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them. In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to de- livery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your ve- hicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- cessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your ve- hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe op- eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- MINDERS! Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs. ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle fea- tures or taking other actions that could distract you.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap- propriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.

ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea- tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

FOREWORD READ FIRSTTHEN DRIVE SAFELY

ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its perfor- mance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or per- formance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered un- der NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for ex- ample remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnos- tics, telematics or engine reprogram- ming, may cause interference or dam- age to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un- less specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your ve- hicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of pro- duction, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or in- stalled on your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustra- tions in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, perfor- mance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https:// owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-

fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO- GRAM page in this Owners Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or se- rious personal injury. To avoid or re- duce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed care- fully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illus- tration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat- teries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: Per- chlorate Material special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.

Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me- chanical, photocopying, recording or oth- erwise, without the prior written permis- sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

APD1005

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please con- tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- ment using our toll-free number: For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: Your name, address, and telephone

number Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the driver's side)

Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer's name Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the informa- tion at: For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

1. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 2. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) (P. 1-42) 3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5) 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and

shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-10, 1-42) 6. Rear outboard seat mounted side-

impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 7. Top tether anchor (located on seat-

back) (P. 1-21) 8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-21) 9. Rear seats (P. 1-2) 10. Front seat side-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 11. Front seats (P. 1-2) 12. Driver supplemental knee air bag

(P. 1-42) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2628

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-21) 2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41) 3. Windshield (P. 8-17) 4. Power windows (P. 2-68) 5. Door locks (P. 3-4)

NISSAN Intelligent Key (P. 3-2) Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-28) Side camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-17)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-28) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-28)

8. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-44) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-44) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) (P. 2-44)

10. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-17)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LIC3972

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P. 4-64) 2. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-44) 3. High mount stop light (P. 8-24) 4. Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41) 5. Liftgate release (P. 3-22)

Rearview camera (P. 4-9, 4-17) 6. Parking sensor(s) (if so equipped)

(P. 5-105) 7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24) 8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)

Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-25) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2618

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Glove box (P. 2-59) 2. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28) 3. Map lights (P. 2-71) 4. Sun visors (P. 3-27) 5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-59) 6. Center console storage (P. 2-59) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2455

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-32) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/

turn signal switch (P. 2-44) 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)

Horn (P. 2-52) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (if so equipped) (P. 2-23)

5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41) 6. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-42) 7. Center display controls (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-44) Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-44)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-44) 10. Passenger's supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42) 11. Glove box (P. 2-59) 12. Passenger supplemental knee air bag

(P. 1-42) 13. Climate controls (P. 4-33, 4-41)

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

14. Shift lever (P. 5-17) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11) 16. Power outlet (P. 2-57)

USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-44) AUX jack (P. 4-2, 4-44)LII2620

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

17. Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-2, 4-67) Cruise control switches (P. 5-52)

18. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42)

19. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-26)

20. Hood release (P. 3-21) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25)

21. Steering wheel switches for audio control (P. 4-2, 4-63) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-23)

22. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55) Instrument panel pocket (if so equipped) (P. 2-59) Enter/select switch for trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)

* Refer to the separate NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

HR16DE engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4) 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-10) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-5) 4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-5) 5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9) 6. Fuse box (P. 8-19) 7. Battery (P. 8-12) 8. Air cleaner (P. 8-16) 9. Engine drive belt location (P. 8-14)

LDI3467

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning light

Name Page

or

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

2-12

Automatic Emer- gency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped)

2-12

Automatic Emer- gency Braking (AEB) with Pedes- trian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)

2-13

Warning light

Name Page

or

Brake warning light

2-13

Charge warning light

2-13

Door open warn- ing light (if so equipped)

2-14

Engine oil pres- sure warning light

2-14

High temperature warning light (red) (if so equipped)

2-14

Warning light

Name Page

LED Headlight system warning light (if so equipped)

2-14

Low fuel warning light (if so equipped)

2-15

Low tire pressure warning light

2-15

Low windshield- washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

2-16

Master warning light (if so equipped)

2-16

NISSAN Intelligent Key warning light (if so equipped)

2-17

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning light

Name Page

Power steering warning light

2-17

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)

2-17

Seat belt warning light and chime

2-18

Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)

2-18

Supplemental air bag warning light

2-18

Indicator light

Name Page

Blind Spot Warn- ing (BSW) indica- tor light (if so equipped)

2-19

CRUISE indicator light (if so equipped)

2-19

DRIVE SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped)

2-19

Engine start op- eration indicator light (if so equipped)

2-19

Front fog light in- dicator light (green) (if so equipped)

2-19

Indicator light

Name Page

Front passenger air bag status light

2-19

High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

2-19

High beam indi- cator light (blue)

2-20

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (if so equipped)

2-20

Malfunction Indi- cator Light (MIL)

2-20

Overdrive OFF in- dicator light (if so equipped)

2-21

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator light

Name Page

Security indicator light (if so equipped)

2-21

SET indicator light (if so equipped)

2-21

Side light and headlight indica- tor light (green)

2-21

Slip indicator light 2-21

Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights

2-21

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

2-22

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Removable (without Bose head restraint/headrest speaker system only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Small Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . .1-61 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-62

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and re- ceive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional infor- mation, refer to Precautions on seat belt usage in this section.

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

Do not leave children unattended in- side the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu- ally. For additional information about ad- justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or back- ward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback for- ward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seat- back in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional informa- tion, refer to Precautions on seat belt us- age in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest

LRS2795 LRS2814

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (driver's seat) Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired po- sition is achieved.

FOLDING REAR SEAT Pull the knob OA to fold each seatback down.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in seri- ous injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2202 LRS3072

1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from slid- ing or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- den stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end colli- sions. Adjustable head restraints/ headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or re- move the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/ headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, rein- stall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to fol- low these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/ headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating posi- tions equipped with head restraints/ headrests. Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint. Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte- grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

LRS2695

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment po- sition.

The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.

Proper Adjustment: For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.

If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that des- ignated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS 1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS 1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2300 LRS2299

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REMOVE Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest: 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop- erly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

REMOVABLE (without Bose head restraint/headrest speaker system only)

CAUTION

Do not remove head restraint/headrest from vehicles equipped with Bose head restraint/headrest speaker system. Removal may damage the system wiring.

LRS2302 LRS2302

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

INSTALL 1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks

with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches) O1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob O2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

ADJUST For adjustable head restraint/headrest Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Raise To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supple- mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

WARNING

The seat belt should be properly ad- justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

WARNING

Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal in- juries in an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- curely fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the ve- hicle than there are seat belts.

If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indi- cate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

All seat belt assemblies, including re- tractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any colli- sion. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a colli- sion be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the re- straint manufacturer's inspection in- structions and replacement recom- mendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

SSS0014

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT Both the driver's and passenger's front seats are equipped with a seat belt warn- ing light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to Warn- ing lights, indicator lights and audible re- minders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific rec- ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and re- ceive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

LRS0786

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be se- riously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be un- buckled or is already unbuckled, re- lease the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa- tion, refer to Seats in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac- tor and insert the tongue into the buckle OA until you hear and feel the latch engage. The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

LRS2795 LRS3087

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips OB as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack OC . Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- tend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re- turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, re- fer to Child restraints in this section. The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During nor- mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is ac- tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the op- eration of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Supplemental air bag warning light in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer- tain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passen- gers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2675

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati- cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re- strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, refer to Precau- tions on seat belt usage in this section. To adjust, pull out the adjustment button O1

and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position O2 , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the ad- justment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242

1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

After adjustment, release the adjust- ment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may re- duce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

Seat belt hook When the seat belt is not in use and when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/ shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The ex- tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

Never use seat belt extenders to in- stall child restraints. If the child re- straint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution rec- ommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

LRS3082

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul- der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other dam- age on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re- tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly re- strained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, includ- ing doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organiza- tions. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re- straint systems: Rear-facing child restraints Forward-facing child restraints Booster seats The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- facing child restraints are available for chil- dren who outgrow rear-facing child re- straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro- tection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improp- erly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

CHILD SAFETY

1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to Child re- straints in this section. A child restraint may be secured in the ve- hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, refer to Child restraints in this section. NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental re- straint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional informa- tion, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) in this section.

INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as pos- sible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- facturers instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommen- dations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- ways follow the manufacturers instruc- tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufac- turer. Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward- facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle por- tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below: Are the childs back and hips against the

vehicle seatback? Is the child able to sit without slouching? Do the childs knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?

Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

Is the child able to use the properly ad- justed head restraint/headrest?

Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques- tions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or col- lision.

LRS2690

1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use and instal- lation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol- low all of the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for instal- lation and use.

Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.

Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.

NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly re- strained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, refer to Forward-

facing child restraint installation using the seat belts in this section.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

Be sure to purchase a child re- straint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum- stances are they to be used to at- tach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- straint will not be properly in- stalled using the damaged an- chorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or other items.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.

Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- sible after fitting the child restraint.

Infants and children should al- ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.

When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH sys- tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure oc- cupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- ments that can be connected to these an- chors. For additional information, refer to LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system in this section. If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. Several manufacturers offer child re- straints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: Choose only a restraint with a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjust- ments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.

If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use the LATCH anchors to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).

If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child re- straint.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installa- tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the ve- hicle is being operated. Canadian law re- quires the top tether strap on forward- facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special an- chor points that are used with LATCH sys- tem compatible child restraints. This sys- tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve- hicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instruc- tions for installation. The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use and installa- tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

Inspect the lower anchors by insert- ing your fingers into the lower an- chor area. Feel to make sure there

are no obstructions over the an- chors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child re- straint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LRS3073 LATCH system lower anchor locations

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower an- chors.

Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- ments that can be connected to two an- chors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

LRS3036 LATCH lower anchor location

LRS0661 LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0662 LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor WARNING

If the cargo cover (if so equipped) con- tacts the top tether strap when it is at- tached to the top tether anchor, re- move the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether strap during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.

Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located on the back of the rear seats.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed

using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions.

LRS3063

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- tachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attach- ment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to com- press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- back while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

LRS2997 Rear-facing webbing-mounted step 2

LRS2996 Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2

LRS0673 Rear-facing step 3

1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the re- straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the re- straint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. For additional informa- tion, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

LRS0674 Rear-facing step 4

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt re- tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

WRS0256 Rear-facing step 1

WRS0761 Rear-facing step 2

LRS0669 Rear-facing step 3

1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

LRS0670 Rear-facing step 4

WRS0762 Rear-facing step 5

WRS0763 Rear-facing step 6

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

7. Check to make sure that the child re- straint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional infor- mation, refer to Installing top tether strap in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child re- straint is removed. For additional infor- mation, refer to Head restraints/ headrests in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment informa- tion.

LRS2995 Forward-facing webbing-mounted

step 2

LRS2994 Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2

1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child re- straint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to com- press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- back while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to re- move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the re- straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the re- straint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

LRS0671 Forward-facing step 4

WRS0697 Forward-facing step 6

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

1 Top tether strap

2 Anchor point Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments. First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi- tions only).

Rear bench seat OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to Head restraints/headrests in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- chor point as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

If you have any questions when install- ing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LRS3060 Rear seats

1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. For additional informa- tion, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section. Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

Child safety and Child restraints sections before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

WRS0699 Forward-facing (front passenger seat)

step 1

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Follow these steps to install a forward- facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- ger seat: 1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manu- facturers instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child re- straint is removed. For additional infor- mation, refer to Head restraints/ headrests in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child re- straint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installa- tion only). For additional information, re- fer to Installing top tether strap in this section.

WRS0680 Forward-facing step 3

1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt re- tractor is in the Automatic Locking Re- tractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

LRS0667 Forward-facing step 4

LRS0668 Forward-facing step 5

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rear- ward firmly in the center of the child re- straint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

WRS0681 Forward-facing step 6

WRS0698 Forward-facing step 8

1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illu- minated, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

1 Top tether strap

2 Anchor point Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts. First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to Head restraints/headrests in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- chor point as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION 1. Position the top tether strap as shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- chor point as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

If you have any questions when install- ing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LRS0865 Forward-facing step 10

LRS3060 Rear seats

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in- structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or col- lision greatly increases: Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.

Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm.

A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/ shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat B. High back booster seat

LRS2479

1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca- nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system.

Make sure the childs head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the childs ears, a high back booster seat should be used.

If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recom- mended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the ve- hicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us- ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety, Child restraints and Booster seats sec- tions of this manual before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453

LRS0464

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rear- most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manu- facturers instructions.

WRS0699 LRS0454 Front passenger position

LRS0451 Rear center position

1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional infor- mation, refer to Head restraints/ headrests in this section.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the childs hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufactur- ers instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up ex- tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle por- tion of the childs shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- structions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three-point type seat belt with retractor in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section.

LRS0452 Rear outboard position

LRS0865

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS This SRS section contains important infor- mation concerning the following systems: Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- mental air bag

Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bag

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the rear outboard seat passengers in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- pacted. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags This system can help cushion the impact force to the drivers and front passengers knees in certain collisions. The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger and rear seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional informa- tion, refer to Seat belts in this section. The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- ity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents

The front passenger air bag and pas- senger knee air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and sta- tus light in this section.

The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sit- ting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System, if you are un- restrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also re- ceive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel

or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.

The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sen- sors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Fail- ure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sen- sor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and passen- ger knee air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional infor- mation, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section.

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

WARNING

Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some ex- amples of dangerous riding posi- tions are shown in the illustrations.

WARNING

Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre- teens and children should be prop- erly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1133

ARS1041

ARS1042

1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seri- ously injure or kill your child. For ad- ditional information, refer to Child restraints in this section.

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

WARNING

Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

WARNING

The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front and rear seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some ex- amples of dangerous riding posi- tions are shown in the previous illustrations.

WRS0431 LRS3119

1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be espe- cially careful with children, who should always be properly re- strained. Some examples of danger- ous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Do not use seat covers on the front or rear seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0162

SSS0159

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) 1. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags

5. Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bags (drivers side shown; front passenger side similar)

6. Side satellite sensors (drivers side shown; front passenger side similar)

7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) (drivers side shown; front passen- ger side similar)

8. Front door satellite sensor (drivers side shown; front passenger side similar)

9. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor located in front passenger cushion frame)

10. Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag

11. Crash zone sensor LRS3234

1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas- sengers NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, please observe the following items. Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket.

Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seat- back, such as a child restraint in- stalled in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.

Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child re- straint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For addi- tional information, refer to Child re- straints in this section.

Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.

If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described later in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your front passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occu- pants in the rear seating positions.

Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag sta- tus light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is de- signed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dash- board above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain fron- tal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi- cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op- eration is based on the severity of a colli- sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classifi- cation sensors are also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend- ing on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad- ditionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight de- tected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front pas- senger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to Front pas- senger air bag and status light in this sec- tion. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the sys- tem. If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a dis- ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual. When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the re- lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- tion and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce seri- ous injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags, other than the driv- ers and passengers knee air bag, do not provide restraint to the lower body. Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can in- crease the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tion. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protec- tion. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of in- jury in an accident.

Status light The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag on or off depending on the weight ap- plied to the front passenger seat. The sta- tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air bag status light which is located on the instrument panel. After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illumi- nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS LIGHT ( ) FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small Adult in front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as de- scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal operation and troubleshooting of this occupant classification sensor system, please refer to Normal operation and Troubleshooting in this section.

LRS0865

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as de- scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu- lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requir- ing the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements. The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- dance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula- tions is on the seat, its weight and the childs weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag and pas- senger knee air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for ex- ample, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- propriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classifica- tion sensor is designed to operate as de- scribed above to turn the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a colli- sion or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag and passenger knee

air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional information, refer to Child restraints in this section. If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the objects weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag infla- tion, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, con- trary to the instructions in this manual. Al- ways be sure that you and all vehicle occu- pants are seated and restrained properly. Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front pas- senger air bag and passenger knee air bag are automatically turned OFF. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illu- minated (indicating that the front passen- ger air bag and passenger knee air bag are OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light

1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child re- straint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is posi- tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is nor- mal system operation and does not indi- cate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- ger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the me- ter and gauges area of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Normal operation In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passen- ger based on weight, please follow the pre- cautions and steps outlined below: Precautions Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.

Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

Steps 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the Seats

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean- ing against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet com- fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the Seat belts section of this manual. Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classifica- tion system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front pas- senger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NOTE:

This vehicles occupant classification sen- sor system generally keeps the classifica- tion locked during driving, so it is impor- tant that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classifica- tion sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should con- tinue to remain seated as outlined above. Troubleshooting If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect: 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat: Occupant is a small adult the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors: Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet com- fortably extended to the floor.

A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor be- hind it.

An object placed under the front passen- ger seat.

An object placed between the seat cush- ion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Re- start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially. If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat. This may be due to the following condi- tions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and cen- tered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.

The child restraint is not properly in- stalled, as outlined in the Child restraints section of this manual.

An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seat- back pocket.

A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor be- hind it.

An object placed under the front passen- ger seat.

An object placed between the seat cush- ion and center console.

1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Re- start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially. If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be re- positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions

WARNING

Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instru- ment panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause in- jury if the front air bags inflate.

Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sen- sor (weight sensor). This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or dam- age to the supplemental air bag system.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

Tampering with the front air bag sys- tem may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instru- ment panel assembly by placing ma- terial over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the func- tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim mate- rial, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Ad- ditionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such ob- jects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica- tion sensor (weight sensor).

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may af- fect the front air bag system. Tam- pering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Re- straint System (SRS) wiring har- nesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electri- cal test equipment and probing de- vices should not be used on the air bag system.

A cracked windshield should be re- placed immediately by a qualified re- pair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identifica- tion. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front and rear out- board seats. The curtain air bags are lo- cated in the side roof rails. All of the infor- mation, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to

LRS3142

1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

inflate in higher severity side collisions, al- though they may inflate if the forces in an- other type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are de- signed to inflate on the side where the ve- hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- ments (for example, during severe off- roading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi- cate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- ing condition should get fresh air promptly. Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front and rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How- ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver, front passenger and rear outboard occupants seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finish- ers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during in- flation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short time. The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front and rear seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front and rear door finisher and the front and rear seat. Such objects may be- come dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflate.

Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system com- ponents will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or dam- age to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

Tampering with the side air bag sys- tem may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front and rear seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by in- stalling additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa- tion of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthor- ized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identifica- tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the drivers and passengers side. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in an- other type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.

LRS3080 Drivers side

1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag opera- tion. When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita- tion and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the im- pact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious inju- ries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body. The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occu- pant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time. The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tion. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the drivers or pas- sengers seat. Such objects may be- come dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.

Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental in- flation of the knee air bag system.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.

LRS3211 Passengers side

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

Tampering with the knee air bag sys- tem may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver or passenger knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring har- nesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electri- cal test equipment and probing de- vices should not be used on the knee air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identifica- tion. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

WARNING

The pretensioner(s) cannot be re- used after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the preten- sioner system checked and, if neces- sary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental ac- tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam- pering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work around and on the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of elec- trical equipment. Unauthorized elec- trical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.

If you need to dispose of the preten- sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- posal procedures could cause per- sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- comes involved in certain types of colli- sions, helping to restrain front seat occu- pants. The pretensioner(s) are encased with the seat belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- leased and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi- cate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- ing condition should get fresh air promptly. After the pretensioner(s) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release web- bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner(s) system. For additional in- formation, refer to Supplemental air bag warning light in this section. If the opera- tion of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the preten- sioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

LRS3235

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the sun visors)

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone sensor, occupant classification sensor, the supplemental front-impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag and seat belt preten- sioner systems. The monitored circuits in- clude air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec- onds.

The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and re- paired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys- tems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bag and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only ba- sis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light re- mains illuminated after inflation has oc- curred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LRS0100

1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bag, pretension- er(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the mainte- nance. The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working un- der the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur- tain air bag, or knee air bag has in- flated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated preten- sioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in- spected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the ve- hicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If you need to dispose of a supple- mental air bag or pretensioner sys- tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the im- pact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in in- jury or death.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Vehicle information display (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-23 How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-53 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Rear-door pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Cargo cover (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Personal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

1. Vents (P. 4-32) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/

turn signal switch (P. 2-44) 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)

Horn (P. 2-52) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (if so equipped) (P. 2-23)

5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41) 6. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-42) 7. Center display controls (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-44) Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-44)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-44) 10. Passenger's supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42) 11. Glove box (P. 2-59) 12. Passenger supplemental knee air bag

(P. 1-42) 13. Climate controls (P. 4-33, 4-41)

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

14. Shift lever (P. 5-17) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11) 16. Power outlet (P. 2-57)

USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-44) AUX jack (P. 4-2, 4-44)LII2620

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

17. Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-2, 4-67) Cruise control switches (P. 5-52)

18. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42)

19. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-26)

20. Hood release (P. 3-21) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25)

21. Steering wheel switches for audio con- trol (P. 4-2, 4-63) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-23)

22. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-55) Instrument panel pocket (if so equipped) (P. 2-59) Enter/select switch for trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)

* Refer to the separate NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Tachometer Vehicle information display Odometer Twin trip odometer Fuel gauge

2. Warning and indicator lights 3. Speedometer 4. Trip reset switch

Instrument brightness control knob

LIC3561 Type A (if so equipped)

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

1. Tachometer 2. Trip computer

Odometer Twin trip odometer

3. Speedometer

4. Trip reset switch Instrument brightness control knob

5. Warning and indicator lights

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedom- eter and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display (Type A if so equipped) or the trip computer (Type B if so equipped) to the left of the speedometer.

LIC4284 Type B (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-5

Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer O1 are displayed in the vehicle information display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- sition. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the dis- tance of individual trips.

Changing the display Push the TRIP RESET switch O2 on the right side of the instrument panel to change the display as follows: Trip Trip Odometer Mile- age Trip Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the TRIP RESET switch O2 for more than 1 second resets the currently dis- played trip odometer to zero.

LIC2255 LIC3584 Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3595 Type B (if so equipped)

2-6 Instruments and controls

Average fuel economy information is also available. For additional information, refer to Trip computer in this section.

TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into the red zone O1 . Type A (if so equipped): To access the ta- chometer, use the and on the steering wheel to navigate to the Gauges display. For additional information, refer to How to use the vehicle information dis- play in this section. Type B (if so equipped): The tachometer is located on the left side of the meter cluster.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or re- duce engine speed. Operating the en- gine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

LIC3562 Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3536 Type B (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during brak- ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. Type A (if so equipped): The low fuel warn- ing message shows in the vehicle informa- tion display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warn- ing light illuminates when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- isters 0 (Empty). The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may come on. Refuel as soon as pos- sible. After a few driving trips, the

light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service

For additional information, refer to Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in this section.

DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE) Displays the estimated distance the ve- hicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consump- tion. Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the ac- tual distance that can be driven. DTE display will change to --- when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

LIC3564 Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3593 Type B (if so equipped)

2-8 Instruments and controls

NOTE: The DTE value after refill is estimated

based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.

If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.

Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, sea- sonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the TRIP RESET switch OA . Each time the TRIP RESET switch is pushed, the display changes as follows: Trip A Trip B Odometer The switch for the trip computer is located on the lower left side of the instru- ment panel. Each time the switch is pushed, the display will change as follows:

Average fuel economy Average speed Trip time Trip Distance

Average fuel economy (mpg or km/l) The average fuel economy mode shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change/reset switch for more than ap- proximately 1 second. The display is up- dated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display shows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h) The average speed mode shows the aver- age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset- ting is done by pressing the change/reset switch for more than approximately 1 sec- ond. The display is updated every 30 sec- onds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows (----).

Trip time The trip time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pressing the change/trip switch for more than approximately 1 second.

LIC3594

Instruments and controls 2-9

Trip distance The trip distance mode shows the distance traveled since the last reset. The trip dis- tance can be reset by pressing the change/trip switch for more than approxi- mately 1 second.

Shipping mode This message may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this message appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to Extended storage switch in this section.

2-10 Instruments and controls

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Master warning light (if so equipped) Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped)

NISSAN Intelligent Key warning light (if so equipped)

High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)

Power steering warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

or Brake warning light Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Door open warning light (if so equipped) Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)

Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light (if so equipped)

High temperature warning light (red) (if so equipped)

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator light (if so equipped)

SET indicator light (if so equipped)

LED Headlight system warning light (if so equipped)

CRUISE indicator light (if so equipped) Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) DRIVE SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi- cator light

CHECKING LIGHTS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

, or , , , , , , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , , ,

If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- function. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to Vehicle information display in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without anti- lock assistance. For additional information, refer to Brake system in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. This light illuminates when the AEB system is set to off in the vehicle information dis- play (if so equipped), set to off using the Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped), or the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem is turned off.

2-12 Instruments and controls

If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- tem is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, re- fer to Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) and Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. This light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to off in the vehicle information display (if so equipped), set to off using the Drive Sys- tems OFF switch (if so equipped), or the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is turned off. If the light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection and Intelligent Forward Colli-

sion Warning (I-FCW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not ap- plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol- lowing: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor- mation, refer to Brake fluid in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Your brake system may not be work- ing properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for re- pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stop- ping distance and braking will re- quire greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging sys- tem is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

Instruments and controls 2-13

light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Do- ing so will bypass the variable volt- age control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For additional information, refer to Variable voltage control system in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Do not continue driving if the genera- tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during nor- mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,

stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to Engine oil in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not cov- ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

High temperature warning light (red) (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the high temperature warning light illuminates and then turns off. This in- dicates that the high temperature sensor in the engine coolant system is opera- tional.

When driving, the high temperature warn- ing light may turn off. This indicates that the engine coolant temperature is within the normal range.

CAUTION

If the high temperature warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the engine temperature is extremely high. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle is overheated, continuing vehicle op- eration may seriously damage the en- gine. For additional information, refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

LED Headlight system warning light (if so equipped) This light illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional information, refer to Head- light and turn signal switch in this section.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- tors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illumi- nate. The CHECK TIRE PRES (vehicles without a vehicle information display) also appears in the trip computer or the Tire Pressure Low Add Air (vehicles

with a vehicle information display) ap- pears in the vehicle information display. When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information la- bel located in the drivers door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- flated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. For vehicles without a vehicle information display, the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are in- flated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the igni- tion switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For vehicles with a vehicle information dis- play, the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warn- ing appears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illumi- nated. For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in this section, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving and In case of emer- gency sections of this manual. TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning message /Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal- function. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-15

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe loca- tion and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci- dent and could result in serious per- sonal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure show on the Tire and Loading Information label lo- cated in the drivers door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could af- fect the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.

Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield- washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield- washer fluid as necessary. For additional in- formation, refer to Windshield-washer fluid in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Master warning light (if so equipped) This light illuminates when various vehicle information display warnings appear. No key I-Key system warning Low washer fluid Door open Parking brake release

2-16 Instruments and controls

For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in this section.

NISSAN Intelligent Key warning light (if so equipped) After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off. This light illumi- nates or blinks as follows: The light blinks in yellow when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

The light blinks in green when the Intelli- gent Key battery is running out of power. Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to Battery in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

The light illuminates in yellow when it warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system.

If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the engine is stopped, it may be im- possible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle.

However, in these cases, have the vehicle checked and repaired as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

Power steering warning light

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine run- ning, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering is operational. If the power steering warning light illumi- nates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering is not function- ing properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the power steering warning light illu- minates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. For additional information, refer to Power steering in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.

Instruments and controls 2-17

This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information dis- play or set to off using the Drive Systems OFF switch. If the light illuminates when the RAB sys- tem is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, re- fer to Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates when- ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver's seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is se- curely fastened. The seat belt warning light may also illumi- nate if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger's seat is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the sys- tem does not activate the warning light for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to Seat belts in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual.

Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped) This light blinks red and the key reminder chime sounds if the shift lever is in any position other than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Return the shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the light will turn off. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the chime will turn off. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing: The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec- onds.

The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. Unless checked and repaired, the supple- mental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func- tion properly. For additional information, re- fer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual.

2-18 Instruments and controls

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in this section.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator light (if so equipped) This indicator light will illuminate when the BSW system is operating. If the light illumi- nates yellow while the system is on, it may indicate a malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

CRUISE indicator light (if so equipped) The light comes on when the cruise control switch is pushed. The light goes out when the switch is pushed again. When the cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational. For addi- tional information, refer to Cruise control in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

DRIVE SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped) This light illuminates and then turns off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and when the DRIVE SPORT mode is selected. For additional information, refer to Con- tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped) For vehicles equipped with push-button ig- nition this indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ON position with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi- nates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to Fog light switch in this section.

Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used. For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal restraint system section of this manual.

High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped) This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high

Instruments and controls 2-19

beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational. For additional information, refer to Head- light and turn signal switch in this section.

High beam indicator light (blue)

This blue light comes on when the head- light high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected. The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (if so equipped) This indicator light will blink when the LDW system is operating. If the light illuminates yellow while the system is on, it may indi- cate a malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control mal- function. The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emis- sion control system malfunction exists. If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, refer to Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

Operation The MIL will come on in one of two ways: MIL on steady An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor- mation display (if so equipped) or the trip computer (if so equipped). If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the ve- hicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

MIL blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emis- sion control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h). avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion. avoid steep uphill grades. if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

2-20 Instruments and controls

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so equipped) The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi- nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se- lected. For additional information, refer to Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

Security indicator light (if so equipped) This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position.

The blinking security indicator light indi- cates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. For additional information, refer to Security systems in this section.

SET indicator light (if so equipped)

This light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to Cruise control in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Side light and headlight indicator light (green) The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or head- lights are on. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the side light and headlight indicator light will illuminate when the headlights turn on. For additional informa- tion, refer to Headlight and turn signal switch in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Ve- hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op- erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal. The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. The indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after ap- proximately 2 seconds if the system is op- erational. If the light does not come on have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Instruments and controls 2-21

NOTE:

In case of a turn signal light bulb mal- function, the turn signal will flash at a higher frequency when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on. For additional information, refer to Lights in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the VDC is turned off in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) or by pushing the VDC OFF switch (if so equipped). This indi- cates the VDC has been turned off. Turn the VDC on using the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped) or by restarting the engine. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system in the Starting and driving section of this manual. The VDC light also comes on when the ig- nition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will turn off after a period of time if the system is operational. If the light stays

on or comes on along with the indica- tor light while you are driving, have the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.

While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys- tem working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo- tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de- pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off or to AUTO before leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key door chime The Intelligent Key door chime sounds if any one of the following improper opera- tions is found. The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors. The Intelligent Key is taken outside the

vehicle when operating the vehicle. When the chime sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key Sys- tem. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero.

The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: Audio Information Drive Computer Information Fuel Economy Information Indicators and Warnings Vehicle and Meter Display Settings Odometer/twin trip odometer Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D, L) Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display can be changed using the ,

, and OK buttons located on the steer- ing wheel.

1 - Use these buttons to navigate the vehicle information display.

2 OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle information display.

3 (if so equipped) Returns to the previous menu.

LIC3565 LIC3566

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-23

The OK, and buttons also control audio and control panel functions in some conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display. Dots on the left side of the vehicle informa- tion display will appear if there is more than one page of menu items. The OK button changes the audio source and the

buttons also control voice recognition manual mode. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect Owners Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi- tion the screens that display in the vehicle information display include: Gauges Audio Fuel Economy Drive Computer Warning Review Settings For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to Vehicle information display warnings and indicators in this section. To control what items display in the vehicle information display, refer to Customize display in this section.

SETTINGS The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle infor- mation display as well as the model for several vehicle functions: VDC Setting Driver Assistance Customize Display Vehicle Settings TPMS Settings Maintenance Clock Unit/Language Factory Reset

2-24 Instruments and controls

VDC Setting The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

Menu item Result System Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Driver Assistance The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids and assistance options.

Menu item Result Lane (if so equipped) Displays the available lane options.

Lane Departure Warning

Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Blind Spot (if so equipped) Displays the available blind spot options. Blind Spot Warning Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to Blind Spot

Warning (BSW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Side Indicator Bright- ness

Allows user to change the brightness of the side indicator.

Emergency Brake (if so equipped) Displays the available emergency brake options. Front (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, refer to Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) or Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

Rear (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, refer to Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays the available parking aids options. Sonar (if so equipped) Displays the available sonar options For additional information, refer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in the Starting

and driving section of this manual. Rear Sensor Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off. Display Allows user to turn the display on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Menu item Result Volume Allows user to adjust the volume to High/Med/Low. Range Allows user to adjust the range to Far/Mid/Near.

Moving Object (if so equipped) Allows user to turn moving object detection on or off. For additional information, refer to Moving Object Detection (MOD) in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual.

Cross Traffc (if so equipped) Allows user to turn rear cross traffic alert on or off. For additional information, refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Driver Attention Alert (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system on or off. For additional information, refer to Intelli- gent Driver Alertness (I-DA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Timer Alert Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval. Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Chassis Control (if so equipped) Displays the available chassis control options.

Active Trace Control Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to Chassis Control in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Active Engine Brake Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to Chassis Control in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Customize Display The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display.

Status Allows user to turn the status screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Coolant Temp. Allows user to turn the coolant temp. screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Chassis Control (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

ECO Info Settings Displays the available ECO info settings. ECO Drive Report (if so equipped) Select to display this report when the ignition in switch is placed in the ON position. View History Select to view the vehicles history.

Welcome Effect (if so equipped) Displays the available welcome effect settings. Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.

Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert in this sec-

tion. Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and the horn sounds. Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed. OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

Lighting Displays the available lighting settings.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Menu item Result Welcome Headlight (if so equipped) Displays the available welcome headlight options.

Welcome & Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach and leave the vehicle. Welcome Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach the vehicle. Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they leave the vehicle. OFF Allows user to set the headlights to turn off when not driving.

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Auto Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the auto light feature on or off. Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on af-

ter the vehicle is shut off. Turn Indicator Displays the available turn indicator settings.

3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. For additional information, refer to Headlight and turn signal switch in this section.

Locking Displays the available locking settings. Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is acti-

vated. Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the drivers door is unlocked after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the drivers or front passengers side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Auto Door Unlock Displays the available auto door unlock options. Shift to P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked.

Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the haz- ard indicators will flash twice when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Wipers Displays the available wipers settings.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result Speed Dependent (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. Reverse Link Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off. Wiper with Speed (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off.

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started remotely.

TPMS Settings The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result TPMS Settings Displays available TPMS Settings.

Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Maintenance The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional informa- tion, refer to Changing wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Menu item Result Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Clock Menu item Result

Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include manually setting the time and 12H/24H format. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, re- fer to the separate NissanConnect Owners Manual (if so equipped).

Unit/Language The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Tire Pressures Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units. Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.

Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Menu item Result Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

2-30 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS LIC4279

Instruments and controls 2-31

1. No Key Detected

2. Key Battery Low

3. I-Key System Error: See Owner's Manual

4. Shift to Park

5. Push brake and start switch to drive

6. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

7. Release Parking Brake

8. Low Fuel

9. Door/liftgate Open

10. Tire Pressure Low Add Air

11. TPMS Error: See Owners Manual

12. Alarm - Time for a break? (if so equipped)

13. Power will turn off to save the battery

14. Power turned off to save the battery

15. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

16. Headlight System Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

17. Cruise control indicator

18. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if so equipped)

19. Malfunction (if so equipped)

20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

21. CVT Error: See Owner's Manual

22. Steering lock release malfunction indi- cator (if so equipped)

23. Illumination indicator

24. Transmission Shift Position indicator (if so equipped)

25. High Coolant Temp: See Owners Manual

26. Outside Temperature Display

27. Low Outside Temperature

28. Oil and Filter

29. Tire

30. Other

31. Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

32. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

33. Drive Sport mode indicator (if so equipped)

34. Rear Door Alert is activated (if so equipped)

35. Check Back Seat for All Articles (if so equipped)

36. Driver Attention Alert System Fault (if so equipped)

37. Driver Attention Alert Take a Break? (if so equipped)

38. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) emergency warning indicator (if so equipped)

39. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica- tor (if so equipped)

40. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator (if so equipped)

41. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped)

42. System Fault (if so equipped)

43. Parking Sensor (if so equipped)

44. Unavailable High Cabin Temperature (if so equipped)

45. Parking Sensor Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

2-32 Instruments and controls

No Key Detected This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- tion switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual. Key Battery Low This indicator illuminates when the Intelli- gent Key battery is running out of power. If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat- tery with a new one. For additional infor- mation, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual. I-Key System Error: See Owners Manual After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for a period of time and then turns off. The I-Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- tem. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Shift to Park This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine. Push brake and start switch to drive This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This indicator also appears when the ve- hicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) function. This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- telligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally. If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key battery dis- charge in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Release Parking Brake This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the ve- hicle is driven. Low Fuel This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-33

Door/liftgate Open This warning illuminates when a door or the liftgate has been opened. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illumi- nates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light re- mains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- sures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to Low tire pressure warning light in this section and Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. TPMS Error: See Owners Manual This warning appears when there is an er- ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Alarm - Time for a break? (if so equipped) This indicator appears when the driver en- ables the Timer Alert function within the Driving Assistance settings and the se- lected set time is expired. The time is based on ignition on time and can be set up to six hours. Power will turn off to save the battery This message appears in the vehicle infor- mation display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional infor- mation, refer to Push-button ignition switch positions in the Starting and driv- ing section of this manual. Power turned off to save the battery This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For addi- tional information, refer to Push-button ig- nition switch positions in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-

mation, refer to Headlight and turn signal switch in this section. Headlight System Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped) This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional infor- mation, refer to Headlight and turn signal switch in this section. Cruise control indicator This indicator shows the cruise control sys- tem status. For additional information, refer to Cruise control in the Starting and Driving section of this manual. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the BSW system is engaged. For additional information, refer to Blind Spot Warning (BSW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Malfunction (if so equipped) This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly: Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

2-34 Instruments and controls

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to Extended storage switch in this section. CVT Error: See Owner's Manual This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warn- ing comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Steering lock release malfunction indicator (if so equipped) This indicator appears when the steering lock cannot be released. If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

Illumination indicator This indicator shows the illumination ad- justment of the instrument panel. For addi- tional information, refer to Instrument brightness control in this section. Transmission Shift Position indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows the transmission shift position. High Coolant Temp: See Owners Manual This warning appears when the tempera- ture of the engine coolant is too high. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Avoid quick starting or abrupt ac- celeration. When the warning turns off, the vehicle can be driven. If the warning appears again soon after it turns off, have the vehicle checked. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Outside Temperature Display The outside temperature display appears in the center region of the vehicle informa- tion display.

Low Outside Temperature This warning appears if the outside tem- perature is below 37F (3C). The tempera- ture can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, re- fer to Settings in this section. Oil and Filter This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the en- gine oil and filter. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the Maintenance and schedules section of this manual. Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replac- ing tires.

Instruments and controls 2-35

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, in- cluding tire pressure checks. For addi- tional information, refer to Changing wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual. Many factors in- cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be re- placed. Setting the tire replacement in- dicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pres- sure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or re- placing maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other mainte- nance items can include such things as air

filter or tire rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset. Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) This warning appears when there is a radar obstruction detected. For additional infor- mation, refer to Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) and Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, refer to Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Drive Sport mode indicator (if so equipped) A small S appears to the right of the Trans- mission Shift Position indicator in the ve- hicle information display when the Drive Sport mode is engaged.

Activate the Drive Sport mode by pressing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position. For additional information, refer to Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual. Rear Door Alert is activated (if so equipped) When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat. Using the steering wheel switch, a driver

can select Dismiss Message to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time.

Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select Disable Alert to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the cur- rent trip.

2-36 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Selecting Dismiss Message during a stop within a trip temporarily dis- misses the message for that stop with- out turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting Disable Alert turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the re- mainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en- ables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to How to use the vehicle information display in this section. For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert in this section. Check Back Seat For All Articles (if so equipped) When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a com- plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes- sage alerts the driver, after a period of time,

to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en- ables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to How to use the vehicle information display in this section. For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert in this section. Driver Attention Alert System Fault (if so equipped) This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func- tioning properly. For additional information, refer to Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Driver Attention Alert - Take a Break? (if so equipped) This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) emergency warning indicator (if so equipped) This indicator illuminates along, with an au- dible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision. For additional information, refer to Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) , Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection and Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the LDW system is engaged. For additional information, refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator (if so equipped) This indicator illuminates to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, refer to Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) in the Start- ing and driving section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system is en- gaged and has detected a vehicle. For additional information, refer to Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) or Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection in the Starting and driving section of this manual. System Fault (if so equipped) This warning appears if there is a malfunc- tion in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, refer to Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) in the Start- ing and driving section of this manual. Parking Sensor (if so equipped) This indicator illuminates when the sensor is activated. For additional information, re- fer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature (if so equipped) This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than approximately 104F (40C). For addi- tional information, refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Parking Sensor Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped) This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional infor- mation, refer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Your vehicle may have three types of secu-

rity systems: Vehicle security system NISSAN Anti-Theft System NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a mo- tion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra- tion occurs.

LIC3633

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)

2-38 Instruments and controls

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- nents in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protec- tion, such as component locks, identifica- tion markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and spe- cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insur- ance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system 1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key fob, Intelligent Key, mechanical key, or door handle request switch (if so equipped).

4. Confirm that the security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre- armed. The vehicle security system will automatically shift into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every three seconds. If during the pre-armed phase one of the follow- ing occurs, the system will not arm:

Any door is unlocked with the key fob, the Intelligent Key, mechanical key, or door request switch (if so equipped).

Ignition switch is placed in the ON position. Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all the doors, hood and liftgate locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When plac- ing the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: The headlights or turn lamps blink and

the horn sounds intermittently but syn- chronously.

The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reacti- vates if the vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by: opening any door, hood or the liftgate

without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock knob).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door or the liftgate with the key fob, pressing the

button on the Intelligent Key, or push- ing the request switch (if so equipped) on the driver's or passenger's door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle.

NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS) (if so equipped) The NISSAN Anti-Theft System will not al- low the engine to start without the use of a registered NATS key. If the engine does not start using the reg- istered NATS key, it may be due to interfer- ence caused by: Another NATS key Automated toll road device Automated payment device Other devices that transmit similar signals

Instruments and controls 2-39

Start the engine using the following proce- dure: 1. Remove any items that may be causing

the interference away from the NATS key.

2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion for approximately 5 seconds.

3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again.

5. Start the engine.

6. Repeat the steps above until all possible interferences are eliminated.

If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the regis- tered NATS key separate from other de- vices to avoid interference.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (if so equipped) The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto- mated toll road device or automatic pay- ment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the de- vice (which may have caused the inter- ference) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's author- ity to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Security indicator light (if so equipped) The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. This function indicates the NISSAN Anti- Theft System (NATS) is operational. If the NATS is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NATS as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SWITCH OPERATION WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the wind- shield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

LIC0474 LIC2661

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-41

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield- washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid con- centrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield- washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in- terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper. The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

1 Intermittent intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward OA (Faster) or OB (Slower). Also, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed (if so equipped). (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

2 Low continuous low speed operation

3 High continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up O4 to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you O5 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

NOTE:

The Wiper with Speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, re- fer to Vehicle information display in this section.

2-42 Instruments and controls

REAR SWITCH OPERATION WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the rear win- dow with the defroster before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield- washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid con- centrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield- washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:

If the rear window wiper operation is in- terrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow, etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper. The rear window wiper and washer oper- ate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.

1 Intermittent intermittent operation (not adjustable)

2 Low continuous low speed operation Push the switch forward O3 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times. If the windshield wipers are on and the ve- hicle is placed in R (Reverse) the rear wiper will automatically turn on while the vehicle remains in R (Reverse).

NOTE:

The Reverse Link feature may be dis- abled. For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in this section.

LIC2662

Instruments and controls 2-43

To defrost the rear window glass, start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indi- cator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. To defrost the outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the outside mirror defroster switch on. The outside mirror defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The rear window/outside mirror defroster (if so equipped) automatically turns off af- ter approximately 15 minutes.

NOTE:

Use defroster and/or outside mirror de- froster when engine is running to avoid discharging the battery.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

LIC3600 Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3570 Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2634 Type A (if so equipped)

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

2-44 Instruments and controls

Lighting

1 Rotate the switch to the position, and the side, tail, license plate, and in- strument panel lights will come on.

2 Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Autolight system (if so equipped) The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The auto- light system can: Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.

Turn off all the lights when it is light. Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

LIC4008 Type B (if so equipped)

LIC4306 Type C(if so equipped)

LIC2636

Instruments and controls 2-45

NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional infor- mation, refer to Vehicle information display in this section. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position O1 .

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, , or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top side O1 of the instrument panel. The au- tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become dis- charged.

Follow me home lighting (if so equipped) The follow me home feature allows you to provide lighting from the vehicle after the ignition switch has been placed in the OFF position. Pulling the headlight stalk toward you once will activate the headlights for approximately 30 seconds. After that pe- riod of time, it will automatically switch off. It is possible to pull the headlight stalk up to four times to increase the lighting period up to 2 minutes.

NOTE:

The follow me home feature can be can- celed by placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

LIC4006

2-46 Instruments and controls

Headlight beam select 1 To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward while the low beams are on. The high beam lights come on and the indicator light illuminates.

2 Pull the lever back to return to the low beam.

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off. The low beams do not need to be on for this to function.

High Beam Assist (if so equipped) The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap- proximately 18 mph (30 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap- pears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automati- cally.

WARNING

The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, en- sure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.

The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the fol- lowing conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually. During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, wind, etc.). When a light source similar to a

headlight or tail light is in the vi- cinity of the vehicle.

When the headlights of the on- coming vehicle or the leading ve-

hicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to for- eign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.

When there is a sudden, continu- ous change in brightness.

When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.

When driving on a road with many curves.

When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.

When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is re- flecting intense light.

When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.

When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, be- ing towed, etc.

The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations. The brightness of the headlights

of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.

LIC2637

Instruments and controls 2-47

The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.

When only one light on the on- coming vehicle or the leading ve- hicle is illuminated.

When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.

Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).

The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

High Beam Assist operation To activate the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po- sition O1 and push the lever forward O2

(high beam position). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illumi- nate while the headlights are turned on. If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), the head- light uses the low beam. To turn off the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the posi- tion or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position.

LIC3696

2-48 Instruments and controls

Ambient image sensor maintenance The ambient image sensor O1 for the High Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: Always keep the windshield clean. Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system The battery saver system automatically turns off the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position. The battery saver system automatically turns off the following lights after a period of time when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position: Headlights, when the headlight switch is

in the or position Interior lights, when left in the ON position

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF posi- tion when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped) The DRL portion of the fog light assembly automatically illuminates when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumina- tion when driving at night. (The DRL will turn off.) If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. The DRL illuminate once the parking brake is released. The DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and oth- ers.

LSD2712

Instruments and controls 2-49

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type B) (if so equipped) The LED DRL portion of the fog light assem- bly automatically illuminates when the en- gine is started with the parking brake re- leased. The LED DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. (The LED DRL will turn off.) If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi- nate. The LED DRL illuminate once the parking brake is released. The LED DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and oth- ers.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

Turn the control knob OA to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights.

LIC4150 Type A (if so equipped)

LIC4151 Type B (if so equipped)

2-50 Instruments and controls

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal 1 Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com- pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal 2 Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

NOTE:

The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to Ve- hicle information display in this section.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the or position, then turn the fog light switch to the posi- tion. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

LIC2638 LIC2639

Instruments and controls 2-51

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in seri- ous personal injury.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat tem- peratures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the en- gine is not running.

Do not use the seat heater for ex- tended periods or when no one is us- ing the seat.

Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blan- ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other- wise, the seat may become overheated.

Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.

If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC3568 LIC3973

HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

2. Push the switch once for the high (2 in- dicators illuminated) setting. Push the switch again for the low (1 indicator illu- minated) setting. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light(s) will remain on as long as the switch is on.

3. Push the switch again to turn it off (no indicators illuminated).

4. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch to turn it off.

The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch is used to turn on and off the BSW system. When the BSW switch is pushed, the BSW system will turn on and the BSW indicator light in the meter will illuminate. When the BSW switch is pushed again, the BSW sys- tem will turn off and the BSW indicator light will turn off. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system may be linked with the BSW system. For additional information, refer to Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

The following systems (if so equipped) are automatically enabled when the vehicle is started: Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) To turn the systems off, push the Drive Sys- tems OFF switch. The Automatic Emer- gency Braking (AEB)/ Automatic Emer- gency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light and the RAB system warning light will illuminate in the meter.

LIC4304 LIC4314

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SWITCH (if so equipped)

DRIVE SYSTEMS OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-53

For additional information, refer to Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) , Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection and Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch is used to turn on and off the LDW system. When the LDW switch is pushed, the LDW system will turn on and the LDW indicator light will illuminate. When the LDW switch is pushed again, the LDW system will turn off and the LDW indicator light will turn off. The LDW system warns the driver with a warning light and chime that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane. For ad- ditional information, refer to Lane Depar- ture Warning (LDW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

The Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system, Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system, or Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- FCW) system may be linked with the LDW system. For additional information, refer to Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) , Au- tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection , and Intelligent For- ward Collision Warning (I-FCW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

LIC4224

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-54 Instruments and controls

WARNING

The Rear Sonar System is a conve- nience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

The RSS (if so equipped) is active when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The indicator light on the switch will turn on. When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

The RSS can be disabled by pushing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled, the indicator light on the switch will turn off. The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is de- pressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator light will come on. The Automatic Emergency Brak- ing (AEB) system warning light also may come on.

LIC4227 LIC4315

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-55

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For addi- tional information, refer to Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system in the Start- ing and driving section of this manual.

The Rear Door Alert system functions un- der certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle. The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis- abled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Vehicle in- formation display warnings and indicators in this section. When the system is enabled: The system is activated when a rear door

is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the driver door is closed and the system is acti- vated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert is activated in this section.

If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven within approxi- mately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to activate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is acti- vated:

When the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information dis- play with the options to Dismiss Mes- sage or Disable Alert if desired. Select Disable Alert to temporarily

disable for that stop. No selection or Dismiss Message will

keep the alert enabled for that stop. If the alert is enabled when a driver exits

the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states Check Back Seat For All Articles. If Horn & Alert setting is selected: An audible horn sound will occur after

a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert.

If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound.

If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the trunk is closed.

NOTE:

If Alert Only setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound.

REAR DOOR ALERT (if so equipped)

2-56 Instruments and controls

WARNING

If the driver selects Disable Alert, no audible alert will be provided regard- less of rear door open/close status.

There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, if rear seat pas- sengers enter or exit the vehicle dur- ing a trip.

The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indi- cating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).

NOTE:

There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or pas- sengers in the rear seat(s). For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert is activated in this section.

12V OUTLETS The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. It is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The front console power outlet is powered only when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or while the accessory power is active.

NOTE: When the ignition is in the OFF position,

the front console power outlet stops delivering power one minute after the door is opened and stays open.

If the door remains closed after the ig- nition is placed in the OFF position, the front console power outlet continues to deliver power until the accessory power timer has elapsed.

CAUTION

The outlet and plug may be hot dur- ing or immediately after use.

Only certain power outlets are de- signed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power out- let for an accessory lighter. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.

Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the ve- hicle battery.

Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off.

LIC4003 Instrument Panel

POWER OUTLETS

Instruments and controls 2-57

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal tem- perature fuse may open.

When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

The extended storage switch is used when the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is located in the fuse panel OA which is on the drivers side left kick panel, near the floor, on the inside of the panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

LIC3581 LIC3266 Pulled position

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

2-58 Instruments and controls

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS REAR-DOOR POCKETS (if so equipped)

LIC3268 Pushed position

LIC4303 LIC3213

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-59

SEATBACK POCKETS (if so equipped) The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver's and passenger's seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas- sengers NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, please observe the following items: Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest.

Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

STORAGE TRAYS WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

LIC0016 LIC4004 Storage compartment

2-60 Instruments and controls

GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

LIC4301 Instrument panel pocket (if so

equipped)

LIC3986 Center console

LIC3580

Instruments and controls 2-61

CUP HOLDERS WARNING

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

CAUTION

Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.

Do not use bottle holder for open liq- uid containers.

LIC3987 Front console

LIC3574 Bottle holder front

LIC3575 Bottle holder rear

2-62 Instruments and controls

LUGGAGE HOOKS The luggage hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook. The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from slid- ing or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- den stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Use suitable ropes and hooks to se- cure cargo.

Never allow anyone to ride in the lug- gage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve- hicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be se- riously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

GROCERY HOOKS The grocery hooks are located in the cargo area and allow for standard size plastic grocery bags to hang side by side.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 6.6 lbs. (3 kg) to a single grocery hook.

LIC4300 LIC3569 Left side shown (right similar)

Instruments and controls 2-63

CARGO COVER (if so equipped) WARNING

Never put anything on the cargo cover, no matter how small. Any ob- ject on it could cause an injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs. (20 kg) on the cargo cover for long periods of time.

Do not leave the cargo cover in the vehicle with it disengaged from the holder.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from slid- ing or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- den stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Properly secure cargo and do not al- low it to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Cargo that is not properly se- cured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision. If the cargo cover contacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor, remove the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not re- moved, it may damage the top tether strap during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.

The cargo cover keeps the luggage com- partment contents hidden from the out- side.

To remove the cargo cover:

1 Remove the straps from the rear hatch.

2 Remove the cargo cover from the hold- ers on the rear pillar.

LIC3349

2-64 Instruments and controls

ROOF RACK (if so equipped) WARNING

Always install the crossbars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicles roof may cause vehicle damage.

Roof rack cross bars should be evenly distributed.

Do not exceed maximum roof rack crossbars load capacity and always distribute the load uniformly.

Heavy loading of the crossbars has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from slid- ing or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carry- ing capacity, especially if the signifi- cant portion of that load is carried on the crossbars.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you can- not comfortably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or a stool.

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side rails OA . Crossbars OB must be in- stalled before applying load/cargo/ luggage to the roof of the vehicle.

Genuine NISSAN accessory crossbars may be available through a NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. The service load capacity for the roof side rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg.), however do not ex- ceed the crossbars load capacity. Be careful that your vehicle does not ex- ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and rear). For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to: F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certification label (lo-

cated on the drivers door pillar). LIC4202

Instruments and controls 2-65

Installing Crossbars (if so equipped)

WARNING

It is recommended that you have the roof rack crossbars installed by a NISSAN dealer.

Protect the painted area on the ve- hicle roof under the crossbars by placing a piece of cloth under the cross bars to prevent scratch damage.

Removal and re-installation of cross- bars requires purchase of new M6 bolts (T99R1 5RL0A-S1) or the re- application of thread-locking adhe- sive such as LOCTITE , 242 , or equivalent.

Do not attempt to adjust fasteners on the underside of the end sup- ports. Fasteners are pre-adjusted to the proper torque requirement by the manufacturer.

1. Manually remove all 8 protective caps from the roof rack rails. See Fig. 1.

NOTE:

Please stow these protective covers in the glove box.

CAUTION

Covers should be re-installed if cross- bar is removed.

2. Identify the FRONT (A) & REAR (B) cross- bar assembly in the kit.

NOTE:

REAR Crossbar is shorter in length com- pared to the FRONT Crossbar

LIC4010 LIC4011

2-66 Instruments and controls

3. Identify markings on bottom side of crossbar end supports.

NOTE: FL is FRONT Crossbar Driver Side. FR is FRONT Crossbar Passenger Side RL is REAR Crossbar Driver Side. RR is REAR Crossbar Passenger Side-

.When assembled, the Arrow on the bottom side of the crossbar end support always points towards the front of the vehicle.

4. Position FRONT crossbar onto left and right roof rack rail; and adjust right support in and out until it fits securely into position. See Fig. 4.

5. Make sure that the FRONT crossbar is in proper position with respect to the roof rack rail attachment positions, and loosely install all 4 bolts on FRONT crossbar using the T30 TORX screwdriver provided. See Fig. 5.

NOTE:

Start with driver side front bolt. Bolts should not be fully tightened, only par- tially tightened.

LIC4012 LIC4013 LIC4014

Instruments and controls 2-67

6. Tighten all 4 bolts to 89 N-m torque using a T30 TORX torque wrench.

NOTE: a. Start with driver side front bolt.

b. T30 TORX torque wrench is not pro- vided with kit.

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the REAR crossbar installation. 8. After installation, gently wiggle the cross- bars to check for any loose fit. If loose fit is noticed, please uninstall and repeat the steps 4 through 7.

WARNING

Please locate max load label on crossbar end support.

Do not load more that 100 lbs. (45kg). Be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR Front and Rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the Safety Compliance Certification La- bel. For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to the Techni- cal and consumer information sec- tion of this manual.

Always evenly distribute the luggage and appropriate crossbar attach- ment on the crossbar.

POWER WINDOWS WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before clos- ing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadver- tent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig- nition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

LIC4015

WINDOWS

2-68 Instruments and controls

Driver's side power window switch

The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows. To open a window, push the switch to the detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the de- tent and continue to hold up until the de- sired window position is reached.

Front passenger's power window switch The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's win- dow. To open the window partially, push the switch down O1 lightly until the desired window position is reached. To close the window partially, pull the switch up O2 until the desired window position is reached.

LIC3238

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side automatic switch

4. Right rear passenger side switch

5. Left rear passenger side switch

6. Drivers side automatic switch

LIC3588

Instruments and controls 2-69

Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down O1 . To close the window, pull the switch up O2 .

Locking passengers' windows When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with au- tomatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and re- lease it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the win- dow is opening. If so equipped, it may be possible to fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function The auto-reverse function can be acti- vated when a window is closed by auto- matic operation. Depending on the environment or driv- ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- tion may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme- diately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, re- placed, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. Have the power window auto- reverse system re-initialized. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with auto- matic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

LIC2663 LIC0410

2-70 Instruments and controls

When power window switch does not operate If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initial- ize the power window system: 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.

4. Release the power window switch. Op- erate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. The power window automati- cally opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.

If the power window function does not op- erate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position. When the switch is in the ON position O3 , the interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. When the switch is in the O2 position, the interior lights will stay on for a period of time when:

LIC3985

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-71

The doors are unlocked by the key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The drivers door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the timer is acti- vated when: The drivers door is locked by the key, or

the power door lock switch. The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position. When the switch is in the OFF position O1 , the interior lights do not illuminate, regard- less of door position. The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to pre- vent the battery from becoming dis- charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- sult in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHTS To turn the map lights on, push the switch to the O1 position. To turn them off, push the switch to the O2 position.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- sult in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHT The personal light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position. When the switch is in the ON position O1 , the light illuminates, regardless of door po- sition. When the switch is in the DOOR position O2 , the light illuminates by opening a door. The personal light will stay on for about 15 seconds when:

LIC3988 SIC2063A Center personal light

2-72 Instruments and controls

The doors are unlocked while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

The driver's door is opened and then closed while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while all doors are closed.

The personal light will turn off while the 15 second timer is activated when: The driver's door is locked by the key fob,

a key or the lock-unlock switch. The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position. When the switch is in the OFF position O3 , the light does not illuminate, regardless of door position. Some vehicles are equipped with a battery saver feature that will automatically turn off the interior lights after approximately 10 minutes if: doors are open, or the interior light switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

NOTE:

If the interior lights are turned off auto- matically by the battery saver feature, the ignition switch must be placed in the ON position before the interior lights will illuminate again. For information regarding the interior light bulb replacement, refer to Exterior and in- terior lights in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- sult in a discharged battery.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT The light illuminates when the rear hatch is opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light goes off. For additional information, refer to Exterior and interior lights in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-73

MEMO

2-74 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 NISSAN Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-19

Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Secondary liftgate unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Card holder (driver's side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicles Intelligent Key System com- ponents.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle. As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key System of your vehicle. Since the registra- tion process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when reg- istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli- gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the Intelli- gent Key: Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo- nents, to come into contact with wa- ter or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key. Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object. Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

LPD2487 Type A (if so equipped)

1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate (one plate)

LPD2797 Type B (if so equipped)

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is com- pletely dry.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- mation regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- cal key. To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver's door.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in- stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the Intelligent Keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com- ponents in your vehicle. The mechanical key can be used for all the locks. Never leave the keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys: If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex- isting key can be duplicated without know- ing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af- ter the registration process, these compo- nents will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registra- tion will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical tran- sponder, to come into contact with wa- ter or salt water. This could affect sys- tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from uninten- tionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadver- tent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH KEY To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as shown.

Manual To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle O1 . To unlock a door, turn the key toward the rear O2 .

Power (if so equipped) The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time. Turning the key toward the front O1 of the vehicle locks all doors. Turning the key one time toward the rear O2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral O3 (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors O4 .

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position O1 , then close the door. To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position O2 .

LPD2777 Drivers side

LPD2942 LPD3078 Inside lock

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passen- ger's side) to the lock position O1 . When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front pas- senger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle while any door is open, a warning chime will sound and all doors unlock au- tomatically.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS All doors lock automatically when the ve-

hicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park) po- sition or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position depending on the option selected in the Vehicle Set- tings menu (if so equipped).

NOTE:

The Auto Door Unlock function can be changed using Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, es- pecially when small children are in the ve- hicle. The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. When the lever is in the unlock position O2 , the door can be opened from the outside or the inside. When the lever is in the LOCK position O1 , the door can be opened only from the outside.

LPD2309 SPA2037

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and com- munication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an air- plane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door and liftgate locks using the re- mote control function or pushing the re- quest switch (if so equipped) on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation. Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving and transmitting radio waves. The Intelli- gent Key system transmits weak radio waves from various distances. Environ- mental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system un- der the following operating conditions: When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broad- casting station.

When in possession of wireless equip- ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans- ceiver, or a CB radio.

When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.

When any type of radio wave remote con- trol is used nearby.

When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.

When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi- tions before using the Intelligent Key func- tion or use the mechanical key. Although the life of the battery varies de- pending on the operating conditions, the batterys life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one. When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a yellow indicator illuminates with the mes- sage Key Battery Low in the vehicle infor- mation display. For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display warn- ings and indicators in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. Since the Intelligent Key is capable of re- ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and per- sonal computer, the battery life may be- come shorter. For additional information, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual. As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch (if so equipped) O1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- charged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) from each request switch (if so equipped) O1 . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function. When the Intelligent Key is within the oper- ating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelli- gent Key, to push the request switch (if so equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION Do not push the door handle request

switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.

After locking with the door handle re- quest switch (if so equipped), verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

LPD2073

LPD2554

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.

Do not pull the door handle before push- ing the door handle request switch (if so equipped). The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out of your pocket or bag. When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock the doors by push- ing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or liftgate request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation.

Locking doors LPD2445 LPD2798

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

1. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

2. Close all doors and the liftgate.

3. Push any door handle request switch (if so equipped) O1 or the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) O2 while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice.

NOTE: Doors are locked by the door handle

request switch (if so equipped) or lift- gate request switch (if so equipped) while the vehicle is any power position and Intelligent Key is in the operating range of the vehicle. For additional in- formation, refer to Operating range in this section.

Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key inside the ve- hicle and a chime sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is in- side the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

WARNING

After locking the doors using the re- quest switch (if so equipped), make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the re- quest switch (if so equipped), make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch (if so equipped) to prevent the Intelligent Key from be- ing left in the vehicle.

The request switch (if so equipped) is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelli- gent Key system.

Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

LPD2816

LPD2446

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When any door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed, a chime will sound and the lock will automatically unlock.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli- gent Key is in the same hand that is op- erating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intel- ligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not func- tion under the following conditions: When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel. When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin. When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets. When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) O1 or the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) O2 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside chime sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) O1 again within 30 sec- onds to unlock all doors and the liftgate.

LPD2798 LPD2816

LPD2446

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

NOTE: If Selective Unlock is turned off in Ve-

hicle Settings of the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped), all doors will unlock upon the first push of the door handle request switch (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" sec- tion of this manual.

Request switches (if so equipped) for all doors can be deactivated when the Intelligent Key Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door. All doors and the liftgate will be locked au- tomatically unless one of the following op-

erations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the request switch (if so equipped). Opening any doors or the liftgate. Engaging the ignition switch from the

locked position. The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position. The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations. Placing the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition. Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. Switching the room light switch to the

OFF position.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can op- erate all door locks using the remote key- less function of the Intelligent Key. The re- mote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve- hicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range. When the doors or the liftgate are open or

not closed securely. When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel- ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Type A (if so equipped) 1. (lock) button

2. (unlock) button

3. (panic) button

Type B (if so equipped) 1. (remote engine start)

2. (lock) button

3. (unlock) button

4. (panic) button

Locking doors 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelli- gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WARNING

After locking the doors using the Intel- ligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these in- structions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may de- crease the safety and security of your vehicle.

LPD3013 LPD3602

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Unlocking doors 1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 30 seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate.

NOTE: If Selective Unlock is turned off in Ve- hicle Settings of the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped), all doors will unlock upon the first press of the key fob. For additional informa- tion, refer to "Vehicle information dis- play" in the "Instruments and con- trols" section of this manual. All doors and the liftgate will be locked au- tomatically unless one of the following op- erations is performed within 30 seconds after pressing the button. Opening any doors or the liftgate. Engaging the ignition switch from the

lock position. The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following opera- tions. Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition. Locking the doors with the remote con-

trol. Switching the room light switch in the

OFF position.

Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- ened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the

button on the Intelligent Key for lon- ger than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. The panic alarm stops when: It has run for a period of time, or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent

Key. The request switch on the driver or pas-

senger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.

Intelligent Key button operation light The light blinks only when you press any button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu- mination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or listen to verify that the vehicle has per- formed the intended operation. The num- ber of blinks identifies each registered key (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for your own identification purposes.

LPD2836

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

If the light does not blink, your battery may be too weak to communicate to the ve- hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to be replaced. For additional information re- garding the replacement of a battery, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to Troubleshooting guide in this section and Vehicle information display (if so equipped) in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve- hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif- ferently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) po- sition with the parking brake fully ap- plied.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- sition.

When pushing the button on the Intelligent Key or the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi- mately a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When opening the driver's door to get out of the vehicle

The Door/liftgate Open warning ap- pears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

When closing the doors after getting out of the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approxi- mately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) warning message appears on the dis- play, the horn sounds three times twice, or a Check Back Seat For All Ar- ticles (if so equipped) warning appears in the display.

The Rear Door Alert is activated. Check the back seat for all articles, press the ENTER button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message.

The Shift to Park warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- tion and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- sition and place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi- mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine

The Key Battery Low warning appears on the display.

The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approxi- mately 3 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The I-Key System Error: See Owners Manual warning appears in the vehicle information display.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intel- ligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

The button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent Key if the vehicle has Remote Engine Start. This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle. The following features may be affected when the Remote Engine Start feature is used: Vehicles with a manual climate control

system (if so equipped) will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.

Vehicles with an automatic climate control system (if so equipped) will default to either heating or cooling mode. For additional in- formation, refer to Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may re- strict the use of remote starters. For ex- ample, some laws require a person using Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any re- quirements. Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- tional information, refer to Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work in this section. Other conditions can affect the perfor- mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in this section.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present: The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

The hood is not securely closed. The hazard indicator lights are on. The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

The button is not pressed and held for at least 2 seconds.

The button is not pressed and held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock but- ton.

The brake is pressed. The doors are not closed and locked. The liftgate is open. The IKey System Error warning shows in

the vehicle information display (if so equipped).

The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.

The vehicle is not in P (Park). There is a detected registered key already

inside of the vehicle.

LPD2995

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Remote Engine Start function has been switched to the OFF position in Ve- hicle Settings of the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional in- formation, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE

WARNING

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave chil- dren, people who require the assis- tance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera- ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- charged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intel- ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the ve- hicle. The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve- hicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE To use the Remote Engine Start feature perform the following: 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the button to lock all doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle is not within view press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts: The parking lights will turn on and remain

on as long as the engine is running. The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on. The engine will continue to run for 10 min-

utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For addi- tional information, refer to Extending en- gine run time in this section.

Press and hold the brake pedal while switching the ignition to the ON position before driving. For additional information, refer to Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in Remote starting the vehicle in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows: The first 10 minute run time will start

when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

The second 10 minutes will start immedi- ately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 min- utes, and 10 minutes are added, the en- gine will run for a total of 15 minutes.

Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position before the Remote Engine Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following: Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press until the parking lights turn off. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. Cycle the ignition switch on and then off. The extended engine run time has ex-

pired. The first 10 minute timer has expired. Opening the engine hood. Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park).

The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

Pushing the ignition switch without the Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

Not pressing the brake pedal while press- ing the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present: The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position. The hood is not securely closed. The hazard indicator lights are on. The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

The button is not pressed and held for at least 2 seconds.

The button is not pressed and held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock but- ton.

The brake is pressed. The doors are not closed and locked.

The liftgate is open. The IKey System Error warning shows in

the vehicle information display (if so equipped).

The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.

The vehicle is not in P (Park). There is a detected registered key already

inside of the vehicle. The Remote Engine Start function has

been switched to the OFF position in Ve- hicle Settings of the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional in- formation, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle OA lo- cated below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.

2. Push the lever OB at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood OC .

3. Remove the support rod and insert it into the slot OD .

4. When closing the hood, reset the sup- port rod to its original position.

5. When closing the hood, return the sup- port rod to its original position, lower the hood slowly and drop the hood from the height of 8 to 12 in (20 to 30 cm). This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.

If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2494

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

WARNING

Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.

Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assis- tance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidently injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate.

CAUTION

Before opening the liftgate, be sure to clear away snow, ice or dust that may be stuck to the liftgate. If the liftgate is opened while materials are still stuck to it, it may suddenly close again due to the weight of these materials.

Always be sure to fully open the lift- gate. If it is not fully opened, it may suddenly shut.

Be especially careful when opening the liftgate in strong wind. The door could be caught by a gust of wind and may close suddenly. The liftgate gas stays OA are installed in

order to support the weight of the lift- gate. In order to prevent the gas stays being damaged or not operating prop- erly, be sure to observe the following points.

Do not insert hands or cords into the gas stays OA or apply any force to them lat- erally.

Do not attach any adhesive foreign ma- terials such as pieces of plastic or stick- ers to the rod OB portion.

LPD2475

LIFTGATE

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Do not close the liftgate while holding the gas stays or hang anything on them. Do- ing so may lead to hands or arms be- coming trapped in the liftgate and could result in an injury.

OPENING THE LIFTGATE To open the liftgate use the following op- erations: Release the mechanical key from the In-

telligent Key and insert the key into the key cylinder on the liftgate (if so equipped) to unlock. Then push the lift- gate opener switch and pull up on the liftgate.

Push the button on the Intelligent Key. Then push the liftgate opener switch and pull up on the liftgate.

With the Intelligent Key in range, push the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) and pull up on the liftgate.

CLOSING THE LIFTGATE

WARNING

Do not shut the liftgate with one hand and the other hand remaining on the liftgate or vehicle body. Doing so may lead to your hand becoming trapped and could result in an injury.

When closing the liftgate, do not place your hands near the edge of the liftgate. Always be sure to close the liftgate from the outside.

After closing the liftgate, be sure to check that it has been closed se- curely. If the liftgate opens while the vehicle is being driven this could re- sult in a serious accident.

To close the liftgate, pull down until it se- curely locks.

LPD2476

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

SECONDARY LIFTGATE UNLOCK Follow the following steps to unlock the liftgate when the battery is discharged.

NOTE:

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for inspection. Unlocking the liftgate:

1. Move the cover OA by using a screw- driver or a similar tool available on hand.

2. Then move the inside lever OB by using a screwdriver or similar tool available on hand. The liftgate will open.

LPD2604 LPD2478 LPD2479

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPENER OPERATION The fuel-filler door release is located below the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel- filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP WARNING

Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- tions. You could be burned or seri- ously injured if it is misused or mis- handled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An in- correct cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the Malfunction In- dicator Light (MIL) to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: Always place the container on the

ground when filling. Do not use electronic devices

when filling. Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are filling it.

Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For additional information, refer to Fuel recommendation in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

LPD2460

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

To remove the fuel-filler cap: 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise

to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook O1 while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap: 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and com- fort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Al- ways sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

MANUAL OPERATION Tilt and telescopic operation Pull the lock lever O1 down: Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction O2 to the desired position. Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction O3 to the desired position.

Push the lock lever O1 up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place.

LCE2260 LPD2448

STEERING WHEEL

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. To block glare from the front, swing down the sun visor O1 .

2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side O2 .

3. Slide the sun visor extension O3 in or out as needed.

CAUTION

Do not store the sun visor before re- turning the extension to its original position.

Do not pull the extension sun visor forcibly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors are illuminated (if so equipped) and turn on when the mirror cover is open.

WPD0435

LPD2820

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

CARD HOLDER (driver's side only) To access the card holder, pull the sun visor down and slide card in the card holder OA . Do not view information while operating the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR The night position O1 reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. Use the day position O2 when driving in daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when nec- essary, because it reduces rearview clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS To operate the outside mirror remote con- trol move the small switch O1 to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch O2 . Move the small switch to the center (neu- tral) position to prevent accidentally mov- ing the mirror.

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirrors while driv- ing. You could lose control of your ve- hicle and cause an accident.

LPD2471 WPD0126 LPD2452

MIRRORS

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the in- side mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

Foldable outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped) The electric control type outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Push the rear win- dow defroster switch to activate the heat- ing function. Push the switch again to de- activate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

LPD0259

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect Owners Manual (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to use the VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-10 How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 How to turn on and off predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-15 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Intelligent Around View Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Intelligent Around View Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-31 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Heater and air conditioner (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 iPod* player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 Bluetooth streaming audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . 4-63 USB/iPod charging ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64

Siri Eyes Free (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Operating Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Phone display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Bluetooth connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . .4-82

iPod/iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84

Refer to the NissanConnect Owners Manual that includes the following infor- mation. Audio system Apple CarPlay Android Auto TM

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone system Viewing information Other settings Voice Recognition (if so equipped) General system information

WARNING

Positioning of the heating or air con- ditioning controls and display con- trols should not be done while driv- ing in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in ac- cidents, fire, or electrical shock.

Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in acci- dent, fire or electric shock.

In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell com- ing from it, stop using the system im- mediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electri- cal shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

NISSANCONNECT OWNERS MANUAL (if so equipped)

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. MENU button

2. Display screen

3. DISP button

4. BACK button

5. TUNESCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND button

6. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button

7. (brightness control) button

8. button*

* For additional information, refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System in this section regarding the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System control button. When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen.

LHA4703

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION

The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.

To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.

Do not splash any liquid such as wa- ter or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the sys- tem to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving. The on-screen functions that are not avail- able while driving will be grayed out or muted.

WARNING

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.

Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Touch-screen operation

LHA5318

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Result Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the Phone key, touch the Phone key on the screen. Touch the key to

return to the previous screen. Adjusting the item Touch the + key or the key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one

item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time. Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123 Touch to manually enter numbers. OK Completes the character input.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces- sary, use a small amount of neutral deter- gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle: 1. Press the MENU button.

2. Touch the Settings key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA5319 LHA5318

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item Result Settings Touch to change the following settings.

Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth phone, Bluetooth audio or USB audio options. For additional informa- tion, refer to USB connections screen and Bluetooth connections screen in this section.

Phone For additional information, refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System in this section. Sound For additional information, refer to Audio system in this section. Volume & Beeps For additional information, refer to Volume & beeps in this section. Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings.

On-screen Clock Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen. Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12hour or 24hour format. Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjust the daylight savings time to on or off. Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes.

System Voice For additional information, refer to Settings in this section. Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings. Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will ap-

pear. Display Touch this key to toggle the display off or to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer

to Adjusting the screen in this section. Language Touch this key to change the language on the display. OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information. Return All Settings To Default

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

(brightness control) BUTTON To change the display brightness, press the

button. Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display. Press and hold the button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press and hold the button again to turn the dis- play on.

HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume) KNOB / PUSH (power) BUTTON Press the PUSH (power) button to turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust audio volume.

SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH BAR Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar O1 which is displayed on most of the main menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as keyboard screens, camera screens, etc.) Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to dis- play the corresponding menu screens.

The following menu items are available on the Launch Bar: AM FM USB/iPod Bluetooth AUX Settings

LHA4707

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

2. DISP button

LHA4681

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the Rear- View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move be- fore operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large station- ary objects directly behind the ve- hicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

The distance guide lines and the ve- hicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for refer- ence only and may be different than the actual distance between the ve- hicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati- cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- tor system uses a camera located just above the vehicles license plate O1 .

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA4109

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer- ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis- played on the monitor. Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body. Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) Green line O3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines O4

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. Predicted course lines O5

Indicate the predicted course when back- ing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their loca- tions on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- ally located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA4805

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the ac- tual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines OA do not touch the object in the display. However, the ve- hicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA5050 LHA5051 LHA4995

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting object The position OC is shown farther than the position OB in the display. However, the po- sition OC is actually at the same distance as the position OA . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position OA

if the object projects over the actual back- ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING

If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the ac- tual course line.

If the battery is disconnected or be- comes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incor- rectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen OA when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA5052 LHA5043

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch

the Settings key.

2. Touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Brightness, Contrast, Tint, Color, or Black Level key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the + or key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the ve- hicle is moving.

LHA4770

LHA3522

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position: 1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to turn the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the R (Reverse) position, press the CAMERA button.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper- ate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show every object.

Underneath the bumper and the cor- ner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor be- cause of its monitoring range limita- tion. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bum- per or on the ground.

Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.

Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

Use the displayed lines as a refer- ence. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.

Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.

Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is in- stalled above the license plate.

When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- sion instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage result- ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction: When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.

When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.

The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

There may be a delay when switching between views.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- ner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.

Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera O1 , the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip- ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA4109

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button LHA4682

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- tem could result in serious injury or death.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle opera- tion because it has areas where ob- jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- ners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the birds-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surround- ings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.

The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- tem is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking. The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen for- mat. Not all views are available at all times. Available views: Front View

An approximately 150degree view of the front of the vehicle.

Rear View An approximately 150degree view of the rear of the vehicle.

Bird's-Eye View The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.

Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View Monitor system uses cam- eras located in the front grille, on the vehi- cles outside mirrors and one just above the vehicles license plate O1 .

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- sition or press the CAMERA button to oper- ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

LHA4113

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will automatically re- turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

The distance guide lines and the ve- hicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Use the displayed lines and the birds-eye view as a reference. The lines and the birds-eye view are greatly affected by the number of oc- cupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle po- sition, road condition and road grade.

If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird's-eye view may be dis- played incorrectly.

When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob- jects viewed in the monitor are fur- ther than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.

Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.

Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

Front and rear view

SAA1840 Front view

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with reference to the vehicle body line OA are displayed on the monitor. Distance guide lines: Indicate distances from the vehicle body: Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) Yellow line O2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) Green line O3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) Green line O4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) (if

so equipped)

Vehicle width guide lines O5 : Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up. Predicted course lines O6 : Indicate the predicted course when oper- ating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight- ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines O6 are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

Birds-eye view The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space. The vehicle icon O1 shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis- tance between objects viewed in the bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle. The areas that the cameras cannot cover O2 are indicated in black.

LHA4992 Rear view

LHA4264

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

After the ignition switched is placed in the ON position, the non-viewable area O2 is highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the birds-eye view is displayed. In addition, the non-viewable corners O3

are displayed in red and blink for the first 3 seconds to remind the driver to be cau- tious.

WARNING

Objects in the bird's-eye view will ap- pear further than the actual distance.

Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.

Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.

The view of the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera po- sition alters.

A line on the ground may be mis- aligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

Front-side view Guiding lines Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor. The front-of-vehicle line O1 shows the front part of the vehicle. The side-of-vehicle line O2 shows the ap- proximate vehicle width including the out- side mirrors. The extensions O3 of both the front O1 and side O2 lines are shown with a green dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their loca- tions on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- ally located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA2652

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the ac- tual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines OA do not touch the object in the display. However, the ve- hicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA5050 LHA5051 LHA4995

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting object The position OC is shown farther than the position OB in the display. However, the po- sition OC is actually at the same distance as the position OA . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position OA

if the object projects over the actual back- ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING

If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the ac- tual course line.

If the battery is disconnected or be- comes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incor- rectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ON po- sition, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen OA when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA5052 LHA5043

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis- plays different split screen views depend- ing on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views. If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: Rear view/birds-eye view split screen Rear view/front-side view split screen If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) position, the available views are: Front view/birds-eye view split screen Front view/front-side view split screen The display will switch from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when: The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position

and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch

the Settings key.

2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Display Settings key.

4. Touch the Brightness, Contrast, Tint, Color, or Black Level key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the + or key on the touch-screen display.

LHA4770

LHA3522

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the ve- hicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accor- dance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. Do not use the Intelligent Around

View Monitor with the outside mir- rors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

The apparent distance between ob- jects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.

The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the vehicle that cov- ers the cameras.

When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, wa- ter may enter the camera unit caus- ing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

LHA4117

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an elec- tric shock.

There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed O1 . When in the birds-eye view, a tall object near the seam O2 of the camera viewing areas will not appear in the moni- tor. The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction: There may be a delay when switching

between views. When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.

When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ some- what from the actual color of objects.

Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environ- ment.

There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird's- eye view.

Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

System temporarily unavailable When the ! icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intel- ligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LHA3591

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the [X] icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiv- ing temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hin- der normal driving operation but the sys- tem should be inspected if it occurs fre- quently. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- ner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.

Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras O1 , the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean- ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3592 LHA4113

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

1. CAMERA button LHA4682

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the Mov- ing Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death.

The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.

The system is deactivated at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h) . It is reacti- vated at lower speeds.

The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances. The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions: When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position. When the CAMERA button is pressed to

activate the camera view on the display. When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.

LHA4190 Front and birds-eye views

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is dis- played: When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects mov- ing objects in the birds-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the out- side mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.

When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not oper- ate if the liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view. When the MOD system detects moving ob- jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in front or rear view and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving ob- jects, the yellow frame continues to be dis- played. In the birds-eye view, the yellow frame O1 is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where mov- ing objects are detected. The yellow frame O2 is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes. A blue MOD icon O3 is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative. If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon O3 is not displayed.

LHA4191 Rear and birds-eye views

LHA4997 Rear and front-side views

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so equipped) Some vehicles include the option to allow the MOD system to be turned on or off in the vehicle information display. To turn the MOD system on or off: 1. Using buttons on the steering

wheel to select Settings.

2. Select Driver Assistance and press the OK button.

3. Select Parking Aids.

4. Toggle ON or OFF Moving Object using the OK button.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limi- tations could result in serious injury or death. Do not use the MOD system when

towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.

Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle win- dow) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as: When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the mov- ing objects.

When there is a blinking source of light.

When strong light such as another vehicles headlight or sunlight is present.

When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.

When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.

When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.

The MOD system might detect flow- ing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.

The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, di- rection, distance or shape of the moving objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is in- stalled, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect ob- jects properly.

When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not dis- play objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.

NOTE: The blue MOD icon will change to or- ange if one of the following has oc- curred When the system is malfunctioning. When the component temperature

reaches a high level (icon will blink). When the RearView camera has detected

a blockage (icon will blink). If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- ner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.

Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras O1 , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wip- ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

Adjust air flow direction of side vents by opening, closing, or rotating.

LHA4113 LHA4123 Side vents

VENTS

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Adjust air flow direction of center vent by moving the vent slides.

WARNING

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assis- tance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the inte- rior air to become stale and the win- dows to fog up.

NOTE: Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.

When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air re- circulation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

LHA4124 Center vents

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

CONTROLS 1. Air flow control dial 2. A/C (air conditioner) button 3. Fan speed control dial 4. Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial 6. Fresh air intake button 7. Rear window defroster switch

Fan speed control dial The fan speed control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial The air flow control dial allows you to select the air flow outlets.

Air flows from center and side vents.

Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from the foot out- lets.

Air flows from defroster outlets and the foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

LHA4202

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fresh air intake Press the fresh air intake button to draw outside air into the passenger com- partment.

Air recirculation Press the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.

A/C (air conditioner) button Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position and press the button to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again. The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch For additional information, refer to Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets. 1. Press the button for normal heat-

ing. The indicator light on the but- ton will go off.

2. Turn the airflow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents. 1. Press the button. The indicator light

on the button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- dows, turn the fan speed control dial to the right and the temperature control to the full HOT position.

Bi-level heating The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the foot outlets. 1. Press the button. The indicator light

on the button will go off.

2. Turn the airflow control dial to the position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

If in the mode for more than 1 minute, the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the vehicle is shut off. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passen- ger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position, and press the button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation. The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the button.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Press the button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

For quick cooling when the outside tem- perature is high, press the button. The indicator light on the button will come on. Press the button for nor- mal cooling. The indicator light on the

button will go off.

Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the button. The indicator light

on the button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Press the button on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

3. Press the button. The indicator light comes on.

When the , or positions in be- tween are selected, the air conditioner au- tomatically turns on. The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan speed control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow control dial is turned to a position other than the position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, al- lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas- senger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

Operating tips Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for two or

three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger com- partment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the inte- rior more quickly.

The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately ten min- utes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

If the high temperature warning light illuminates in red indicating en-

gine coolant temperature is over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrost- ing.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

LHA4674 LHA4675

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4676 LHA4677

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

LHA4678

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Temperature control dial /AUTO button 2. Heated seat switches (if so

equipped) 3. Display Screen 4. Fan speed control dial/A/C (air

conditioner) button 5. Air recirculation button

6. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch

7. MODE (manual air flow control) button 8. Front defroster button 9. ON-OFF button

WARNING

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assis- tance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the inte- rior air to become stale and the win- dows to fog up.

NOTE: Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.

When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air re- circulation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

LHA5218

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

AUTOMATIC OPERATION Heating (A/C OFF) The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

The temperature of the passenger com- partment will be maintained automati- cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.

Not recommended if windows fog up.

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled auto- matically. 1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.

The temperature of the passenger com- partment will be maintained automati- cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1. Press the front defroster button on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the maximum temperature to aid in defogging.

To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed con- trol dial to set the fan speed to maximum.

As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

When the front defroster button is pressed, the air conditioner will automati- cally be turned on.

Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped) Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is acti- vated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the cli- mate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost- ing mode, the rear window defroster and heated seats (if so equipped) may be acti- vated automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control Turn the fan speed control dial to manually control the fan speed. Press the AUTO button to return to auto- matic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Air recirculation Press the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

A/C (air conditioner) button Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position and press the button to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again. The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control Press the MODE button to manually control air flow and select the air outlet.

Air flows from center and side vents.

Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.

To turn system off To turn off the heater and air conditioner, press the ON-OFF button. Press the ON- OFF button again, the system will turn on in the mode which was used immediately before the system was turned off.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch For additional information, refer to Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) For additional information, refer to Heated seat switches in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS The sunload sensor, located on the drivers side of the instrument panel, as shown, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor. When the engine coolant temperature

and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

LHA4125

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

If you feel that the air flow mode you have selected and the outlets the air is coming out do not match, select the mode.

When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot outlets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de- signed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to Air conditioner sys- tem refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer informa- tion section of this manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your environmentally friendly air conditioner system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi- enced technician with proper equip- ment.

RADIO When the ignition is placed in the ACC or ON position, press the PUSH (power) button to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition should be placed in the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station sig- nal strength, distance from radio transmit- ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en- hance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However, there are some general charac- teristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter- ference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception. Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi (40 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station re- ception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol- low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For ex- ample, they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer- ence from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflec- tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric tur- bulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

MP3 or WMA terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital au- dio file format. This format allows for near CD quality sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can re- duce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesnt hear.

WMA Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Mi- crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

Sampling frequency Sampling fre- quency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.

Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writ- ing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.

ID3/WMA Tag The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encod- ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/ song title line on the display.

* Windows and Windows Media are reg- istered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other coun- tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected cor- rectly into the USB port.

Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB de- vice out of the port. This could dam- age the port and the cover.

Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintention- ally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de- vice. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary. This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a per- sonal computer. In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without im- ages for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked. This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system. Partitioned USB devices may not play

correctly. Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using Eng- lish language characters with a USB de- vice is recommended.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

General notes for USB use For additional information, refer to your

device manufacturer's owner informa- tion regarding the proper use and care of the device.

Notes for iPod use iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries. Improperly plugging in the iPod may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod is connected properly.

An iPod nano (1st Generation) may re- main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod.

An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will con- tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is dis- connected during a seek operation.

An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod nano (2nd Generation).

Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod.

Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon re- cover.

If an iPod automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

iPod* player Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. We recommend using English or Spanish language characters with an iPod.

Large video podcast files cause slow re- sponses in the iPod. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.

If the iPod automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.

Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod is connected properly.

The iPod nano (2nd Generation) will con- tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is dis- connected during a seek operation.

An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod nano (2nd Generation).

Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod.

The iPod nano (1st Generation) may re- main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod.

If you are using an iPod (3rd Generation with Dock connector), do not use very long names for the song title, album name or artist name to prevent the iPod from resetting itself.

Be careful not to do the following, or the cable could be damaged and a loss of function may occur: Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40

mm) radius maximum). Twist the cable excessively (more than

180 degrees). Pull or drop the cable. Do not force the iPod cable connector

into the device port. Close the center console lid on the

cable or connectors. Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Spill liquids on the cable and connec- tors.

Do not connect the cable to the iPod if the cable and/or connectors are wet. It may damage the iPod.

If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or connec- tors to dry completely before connecting the cable to the iPod (wait 24 hours for it to dry).

If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the cable, other- wise damage to the iPod and a loss of function may occur.

If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connec- tors), do not use the cable. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the cable with a new one.

When not in use for extended periods of time, store the cable in a clean, dust free environment at room temperature and without direct sun exposure.

Do not use the cable for any other pur- poses other than its intended use in the vehicle.

*iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth streaming audio

Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

It is necessary to set up the wireless con- nection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in- vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio.

Operating procedure of the Bluetooth audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio de- vice before using it with this system.

The Bluetooth audio may be stopped under the following conditions: Receiving a call on the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System. Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone. Do not place the Bluetooth audio device

in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degrada- tion and wireless connection disruption.

While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connec- tion, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual.

This system supports the Bluetooth Au- dio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FM/AM RADIO For additional information, refer to Audio operation precautions in this section. 1. MENU button

2. Display screen

3. SEEK button

4. TRACK button

5. BACK button

6. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE SCROLL knob

7. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH (power) button

8. AUDIO button

Audio main operation VOL (volume) knob / PUSH

(power) button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the PUSH (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth audio, USB or iPod) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the PUSH

(power) button. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad- just the volume. This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac- tive, the audio volume changes as the driv- ing speed changes.

MENU button Press the MENU button to show the Menu screen. Touch the Settings key on the display, then touch the Sound key.

LHA4704

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Sound Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level. Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level. Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers. Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers. Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to OFF to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching -/+, L/R, or R/F keys.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BACK button Press the BACK button to return to the previous menu screen. AUDIO button Press to display the audio screen. When this button is pressed while the audio screen is not displayed, the last audio source played will play.

AM/FM radio screen 1. AM Menu / FM Menu key

Touch to display the radio menu screen.

2. Direct Tune (if so equipped) Touch to manually enter a station.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. Reception information display Reception information currently avail- able such as frequency, station name, etc. is displayed.

5. Preset list To listen to a preset station, touch the corresponding station from the preset list. If displayed, touch the < or > keys to scroll the preset list.

AM radio operation Press the MENU button and touch the AM key or press the AUDIO button and select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar to bring up the AM display screen. If another audio source is playing when the AM key is pressed, the audio source play- ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. AM Menu Touch the AM Menu key to display the AM Menu screen options: SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the AM

Menu key on the radio screen and then touch the SCAN key. The stations will be turned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the SCAN key again during this period of several sec- onds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

LHA4708

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Refresh: Touch the Refresh key to up- date the station list displayed on the right side of the AM Menu screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons Press the or buttons to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting sta- tion. Direct Tune Touch the Direct Tune key to display the Direct Tune menu and manually enter a station. 1 to 6 station memory operations Up to six stations can be registered in the preset list. 1. Select the AM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list. To select and listen to the preset stations, press or on the steering wheel briefly or touch a preferred station on the preset list on the radio screen.

FM radio operation Press the MENU button and touch the FM key or press the AUDIO button and select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar to bring up the FM display screen. If another audio source is playing when the FM key is pressed, the audio source play- ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from ste- reo to monaural reception. FM Menu Touch the FM Menu key to display the FM Menu screen options: SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the FM

Menu key on the radio screen and then touch the SCAN key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting stations for several seconds. Touching the SCAN key again during this period of several sec- onds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

Refresh: Touch the Refresh key to up- date the station list displayed on the right side of the FM Menu screen.

RDS Info: Radio station and song informa- tion can be displayed on the FM display screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons Press the or buttons to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting sta- tion. 1 to 12 station memory operations Up to 12 stations can be registered in the preset list. 1. Select the FM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list. To select and listen to the preset stations, press or on the steering wheel briefly or touch a preferred station on the preset list on the radio screen.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation Connecting auxiliary devices Connect an AUX device into the AUX input jack located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls. The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or phone. Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono plug is used, the audio output may not function normally. Activation and playing Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX cable to the AUX device and the AUX input jack. Select AUX mode from the audio source menu screen or by pressing the Source button on the steering wheel.

AUX screen Audio source indicator

Indicates that the AUX source is currently playing.

Volume Setting keys Touch one of the keys to select the sound output gain from Low, Medium and High.

AUX from Launch Bar Touch to change from another source to AUX.

Additional features For additional information, refer to iPod player operation regarding the iPod player available with this system in this section. For additional information, refer to USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port re- garding the USB connection port available with this system in this section. For additional information, refer to Bluetooth streaming audio about the Bluetooth audio interface available with this system in this section.

Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Labeling Additional Obligation of Labeling This product is protected by certain intel- lectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distri- bution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.

LHA4709

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION PORT

Connecting a device to the USB connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions.

Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected cor- rectly into the USB port.

Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB de- vice out of the port. This could dam- age the port and the cover.

Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintention- ally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your de- vice manufacturer's owner information re- garding the proper use and care of the device. The USB port is located on the center con- sole beneath the heater and air condi- tioner controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compat- ible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle's audio system.

LHA4701

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB connections screen Press the MENU button and touch the Connections key or press the Settings key and touch the Connections key to change USB settings. Auto Change Source

Touch ON or OFF to change the audio source settings for USB memory devices or an iPod connected through a USB cable.

USB screen 1. USB Menu key

Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen.

2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions

5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.

USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions.

Keys Description Each time key is touched, the repeat mode changes. Touch to return to the begin- ning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track. Touch to play the track. Touch to pause the track. Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track. Each time key is touched, the random mode changes.

LHA4711 LHA4710

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

USB memory device player operation

Activation and playing Connecting the USB memory device into the port will start playing the USB memory. USB memory device can also be played by touching the USB key on the Menu screen or by touching USB on the Launch Bar. To pause playing the USB memory device touch the key. To resume playing, touch the key. Skipping tracks To skip the tracks, press the or buttons on the control panel or touch the

or keys on the screen repeat- edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding To rewind or fast-forward the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch and hold the or keys on the screen. Changing play mode Repeat mode Touch the key on the USB screen to change the repeat mode. The following modes are available: All: Repeat all 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder 1 Track: Repeat track Random mode Touch the key on the screen to change the random mode as follows: No text displayed: Random off All: Repeat all 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

USB menu Touch the USB Menu key on the USB screen to display the USB Menu screen.

Now Playing key Touch to display the USB screen.

Folder List key Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The sub- folder or track list will be dis- played. Select a sub-folder or track from the list.

Album Artwork Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod* PLAYER OPERATION Connecting iPod

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected cor- rectly into the USB port.

Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB de- vice out of the port. This could dam- age the port and the cover.

Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintention- ally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your de- vice manufacturers owner information re- garding the proper use and care of the device. To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB connection port located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPod- specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB con- nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection, its

battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. While connected to the vehicle, the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB connection port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod. * iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility The following models are compatible: iPod Classic 5th generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later) iPod Classic 6th generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later) iPod Classic 7th generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later) iPod Touch 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)* iPod Touch 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later) iPod Touch 4th generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

LHA4701

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

iPod nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)

iPod nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)

iPod nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)

iPod nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)

iPod nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)

iPod nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)

iPhone 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later) iPhone 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later) iPhone 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later) iPhone 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) * Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional. Make sure that your iPod firmware is up- dated to the version indicated above.

iPod screen 1. iPod Menu key

Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.

2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. Album artwork An image of the album artwork is dis- played when available if the setting is turned on.

5. iPod operation keys Touch to control iPod playback functions

6. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.

iPod operation keys Touch to control iPod playback functions.

Keys Description Each time key is touched, the repeat mode changes. Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to se- lect the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track. Touch to play the track. Touch to pause the track. Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track. Each time key is touched, the random mode changes.

LHA4724

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod memory device player operation Activation and playing Connecting the iPod to the vehicle via USB cable will activate the iPod mode. The iPod can also be played by touching the iPod key on the Menu screen or by touching iPod on the Launch Bar. Skipping tracks To skip the tracks, press the or buttons on the control panel or touch the

or keys on the screen repeat- edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning. Fast-forwarding/rewinding To rewind or fast-forward the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch and hold the or keys on the screen,

Changing play mode Repeat mode Touch the key on the iPod screen to change the repeat mode. The following modes are available. No text displayed: Repeat off All: Repeat all One: Repeat track Random mode Touch the key on the screen to change the random mode as follows. is not highlighted: Random off highlighted: Random on

iPod Menu Touch the iPod Menu key on the iPod screen to display the iPod Menu screen.

Now Playing key Touch to display the USB screen.

Folder List key (if so equipped)

Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The sub- folder or track list will be dis- played. Select a sub-folder or track from the list.

Album Artwork key

Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen.

Playlists key Touch to display the list ac- cording to the selected item.Artists key

Albums key Songs key Podcasts key Genres key Composers key Audiobooks key iTunes Radio key

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehi- cle's audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle's speakers. For additional information, refer to FM/AM radio in this section.

NOTE:

For additional information regarding Bluetooth Streaming Audio, refer to the cellular phone owners manual.

Connecting procedure NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per- formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the pro- cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System: Manual Connecting Procedure 1. Press the MENU button on the con-

trol panel.

2. Touch the Connections key on the screen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the Add New key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the screen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the connection.

6. To access the Bluetooth settings menu touch the key on the Connections screen. The following options are available:

Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth on and off. Bluetooth must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth functionality on. To turn off, touch the ON key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle Phone and Audio favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

LHA4726

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Automatic Connecting Procedure If no phone is connected to the system, press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the prompt, speak Add Phone, the system will announce transferring to the add phone settings menu. The system will start the pairing procedure. When a com- patible phone is found, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth phone to complete the con- nection process. For additional informa- tion, refer to Bluetooth connections screen in this section.

Bluetooth screen 1. BT Menu key

Depending on the Bluetooth version supported by the connected device, ei- ther the BT Menu key or Connections key is displayed.

2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. Bluetooth audio operation keys Touch to control Bluetooth audio play- back functions

5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.

Bluetooth operation keys Touch to control Bluetooth playback functions.

Keys Description Each time key is touched, the repeat mode changes. Touch to return to the begin- ning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track. Touch to play the track. Touch to pause the track. Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track. Each time key is touched, the random mode changes.

LHA4727

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Bluetooth audio operation The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music may be different between devices. Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device.

NOTE:

Depending on the Bluetooth audio de- vice that is connected, it may not be pos- sible to perform audio operations or a delay may occur before music is played back. Activation and playing A Bluetooth audio device can be played by touching the Bluetooth key on the Menu screen or by touching Bluetooth on the Launch Bar. To pause playing the Bluetooth audio, touch the key. Touch the key to resume playing. Changing folders To change folders, touch the BT Menu key.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding To fast-forward or rewind the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch the or keys on the screen. Changing play mode Repeat mode Touch the key on the screen to change the repeat mode. Random mode Touch the key on the screen to change the random mode.

NOTE:

Available repeat/random modes change depending on the connected device.

BT Menu Touch the BT Menu key on the Bluetooth audio screen to display the Bluetooth au- dio menu screen.

The following items are available.

Now Playing key Touch to display the Bluetooth audio screen.

Current List key (if so equipped)*

A list of track in the cur- rently selected folder is displayed.

Connections key Touch to display the con- nections screen.

Folder List key* Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder.

*: displayed only when available.

NOTE:

Depending on the connected device, the BT Menu key may not be displayed.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL 1. SEEK/TRACK buttons 2. SOURCE switch 3. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode in the following sequence: AM FM USB/iPod* Bluetooth Au- dio* AUX* AM. * These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system.

Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

AM and FM Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station and show a list of the preset stations.

Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station.

iPod Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number. Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the track being played.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song. USB Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number. Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the track being played.

USB/iPod CHARGING PORTS There are USB/iPod charging ports lo- cated on the center console. These ports will charge compatible devices.

NOTE:

The USB/iPod charging ports will not operate with the display screen. Only the USB connection port located on the in- strument panel, below the temperature controls, will operate USB/iPod devices through the audio system.

LHA4227 LHA4725

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

ANTENNA The rod antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counter- clockwise OB . To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod clockwise OA and hand tighten.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging or deforming the antenna, be sure to remove the an- tenna under the following conditions. The vehicle enters an automatic car

wash. The vehicle enters a garage with a

low ceiling. The vehicle is covered with a car

cover. Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the an- tenna rod may break during vehicle operation.

Apple Siri Eyes Free personal assistant can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce user distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac- tion by voice control. After connecting a compatible Apple device by using Bluetooth, Siri Eyes Free can be activated from the button on the steering wheel. Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as

displaying pictures or opening apps, may not be available while driving.

For getting best results, always update your device to the latest software version.

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vi- bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.

For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple website.

LHA4236

SIRI EYES FREE (if so equipped)

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REQUIREMENTS Siri is only available on the iPhone 4S or later. Devices released before iPhone 4S are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility. Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check phone settings. If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be accessible from the lock screen. Please check phone settings. For best results, always update your device to the latest software version.

OPERATING SIRI EYES FREE 1. Press button for less than 1.5

seconds.

2. Speak your command and then listen to the Siri Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, press the button again within 5 seconds of the end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the session. Example 1 Playing music 1. Press button for less than 1.5

seconds.

2. Say Play (artist name, song name, etc.).

3. Your vehicle will automatically change to Bluetooth Audio or iPod mode* when the music starts playing. Mode selection is determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone is also connected with the USB cable. If the audio track does not start playing automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the track or audio source to re- sume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control func- tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone. Example 2 Replying to text messages 1. If a compatible iPhone is connected

and Show Notifications of the iPhone settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis- play a notification for new incoming text messages.

2. After reading the message, press or press and hold the button to reply using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say Text message or a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes Free.

LHA4733

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from switch on the steering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth connection is established between the iPhone and the system. Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting. Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Audio Source does not change automatically to iPod or Bluetooth Au- dio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary. For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade perfor- mance. Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track, previous track or play timer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/ audio being played back from a connected iPhone

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth Audio or iPod mode. A USB connection is required for iPod mode.

Cannot receive text mes- sage notifications on the vehicle audio system

Check if Send Notifications is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth settings. Find the device name, like My Car. Press the INFO button. Turn on Show Notifications.

Cannot reply to text mes- sage notifications by Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say Text Message.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle op- eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.

If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recom- mended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full atten- tion to vehicle operation while talk- ing on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

Keep the antenna as far away as pos- sible from the electronic control modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.

For additional information, it is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Use a phone after stopping your ve- hicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full atten- tion to vehicle operation while talk- ing on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat- tery, use a phone after starting the en- gine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth de- vices. If your phone does not connect au- tomatically to the system, consult the phone's owner's manual for details on device operation. You can connect up to six different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in- vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. Set up the wireless connection between

a compatible cellular phone and the in- vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/ bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connect- ing instructions.

LHA5315

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- vice area. Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area. Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connec- tion, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem cannot charge cellular phones.

Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

For additional information, refer to the cellular phone owner's manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an- tenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.) This device may not cause interfer-

ence and 2.) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regu- lations.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.

USING THE SYSTEM The system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial- ized, which takes a few seconds. If the button is pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce There is no phone connected and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe the following: Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Keep all vents pointed away from the microphone and close the win- dows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from rec- ognizing voice commands correctly.

Wait until the tone sounds before speak- ing a command. Otherwise, the com- mand will not be received properly.

Start speaking a command within 5 sec- onds after the tone sounds.

Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

For calling contacts by name, please say both the first and last name of the con- tact for better recognition.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press the button located on the steer- ing wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the tone sounds, speak a command. The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted. If a command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces, Please say or select a command from the displayed list. Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice.

If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say Go back or Cor- rection any time the system is waiting for a response.

You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by say- ing, Cancel or Quit. The system an- nounces Exit and ends the Voice Recog- nition session. You can also press and hold the button on the steering wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end the Voice Recognition session. Whenever the Voice Recognition session is can- celed, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume control switches on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering wheel. After interrupting the system, wait for a beep before speaking your command. One Shot Call (if so equipped) To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press the button and after the tone say, Call Redial.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INDICATORS When a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connec- tion, indicators O1 for the phone and text messaging are displayed on the top of the screen.

Indicator Description Indicates there are un- read received mes- sages. Indicates the Bluetooth device that is currently connected. Indicates the strength of the signal the Bluetooth device is receiving. Indicates the amount of remaining Bluetooth device battery.

CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel.

VOICE COMMAND BUTTON Press and hold the button for less than 1.5 seconds to initiate the Voice Recognition session. To exit the Voice Recognition session press and hold the for less than 1.5 sec- onds. For additional information, refer to Voice prompt interrupt in this sec- tion.

LHA4723 LHA4684

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

You can use the button to inter- rupt the system feedback and give a command at once.

If an iPhone is connected, Siri can be accessed by pressing the button for more than two seconds. For additional information, refer to Siri Eyes Free in this section.

PHONE BUTTON To answer an incoming call or to end a call press the button.

To reject a call press and hold the button. CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per- formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the pro- cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System: Manual Connecting Procedure 1. Press the MENU button on the con-

trol panel.

2. Touch the Connections key on the screen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the Add New key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the screen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the connection.

6. To access the Bluetooth settings menu touch the key on the Connections screen. The following options are available:

Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth on and off. Bluetooth must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth functionality on. To turn off, touch the ON key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle Phone and Audio favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

LHA4726

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Some cellular phones may require you to accept certain permissions in order to enable features on your Bluetooth sys- tem. During the Bluetooth pairing pro- cess, please check your cellular phones display for a pop-up with the request to grant phonebook access. Granting phonebook access permission will allow your contacts to be down- loaded to the vehicles Bluetooth sys- tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu- lar phone stating that the Bluetooth system would like to access your con- tacts and call history. Please select Al- low or Yes to grant this permission. Automatic Connecting Procedure If no phone is connected to the system, press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the prompt, speak Add Phone, the system will announce transferring to the add phone settings menu. The system will start the pairing procedure. When a com- patible phone is found, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth phone to complete the con- nection process. For additional informa- tion, refer to Bluetooth connections screen in this section.

VOICE COMMANDS Voice commands can be used to operate the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Press and hold the button for less than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone command menu. The commands avail- able are: Call Dial Recent Calls Read/Send Text (if so equipped) Siri (if so equipped) Voice Assistant (if so equipped) Phonebook Quick Dial Redial Select Phone Add Phone Call Mobile Call Home Call Office Call Main Call Other Settings

Call Speak this command to make a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook. Say Call followed by a phonebook name to initiate a call. If the system does not recog- nize the name it will display a list of similar names. After the prompt, speak or touch an item number from the displayed list to place the call.

Dial Speak this command to make a call with a spoken phone number. After the prompt, say Dial followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone number. The system will repeat the num- ber back. Say Dial to initiate the call or Correction to re-enter the phone number.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

Recent Calls The following commands are available un- der Recent Calls: Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last 20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the Next key to move through the list of incoming calls.

Outgoing Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the Next key to move through the list of outgoing calls.

Missed Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the Next key to move through the list of missed calls.

Read Text/Send Text (if so equipped) Speak this command to access text mes- saging functions. For additional informa- tion, refer to Text messaging in this sec- tion.

Phonebook through voice command Speak Phonebook to view a list of quick steps to access entries stored in the phonebook. Commands are organized by the phone number type selected in the cel- lular device. For additional information, re- fer to the cellular phones owners manual.

The following commands are available: Main Home Mobile Office Other For additional information on manually se- lecting phonebook entries, refer to Making a call in this section.

Quick dial Speak this command to access the Quick dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se- lect an item number on the displayed list to place the call. For additional information, refer to Making a call in this section.

Redial Speak this command to call the last num- ber dialed. After the prompt, say Redial to dial the number of the last outgoing call. The system will display Redialing . The name of the phonebook en- try will be displayed if it is available, other- wise the number being redialed will be displayed.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Select Phone Speak this command to access the Con- nections menu. For additional information, refer to Bluetooth connections screen in this section.

Add Phone Speak this command to access the Con- nections menu. For additional information, refer to Bluetooth connections screen in this section.

Settings Speak this command to access the Sys- tem Voice settings menu. The system will exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of the following options on the screen to change the settings. Beep Only for Opening Prompt

By touching the ON key, the indicator light will illuminate, the system voice will turn off and only a tone will sound when the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem is activated. To turn the system voice back on, touch the ON key again, the indicator light will turn off.

Best Match List When the system doesn't recognize a phonebook name or dial number, it will provide a list of similar sounding results. To turn this off, touch the ON key, the indicator light will turn off. To turn on, touch the ON key again, the indicator light will turn on.

PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN The Phone screen can be displayed by pressing the button on the control panel. The following options are displayed: Quick Dial

Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi- tional information, refer to Quick dial in this section.

Phonebook Displays the Phonebook screen. For addi- tional information, refer to Making a call in this section.

LHA4705

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

Call History Displays the Call History screen. For addi- tional information, refer to Making a call in this section.

Dial Number Displays the Dial Number screen. For ad- ditional information, refer to Making a call in this section.

Text Message Displays the received message screen. For additional information, refer to Text messaging in this section.

Connections Displays the Connections screen. For ad- ditional information, refer to Bluetooth connections screen in this section.

Volume Displays the volume adjustment screen. For additional information, refer to Vol- ume & beeps in this section.

MAKING A CALL To make a call press the button on the control panel. Touch an option from menu screen: Phonebook

Select a person and the phone number you wish to call from the phonebook. Depending on the device, the phonebook will be downloaded from the cellular phone automatically when it is con- nected. If the automatic download does not take place, the phone number must be transferred to the hands-free phone system from the cellular phone prior to using this method. For additional infor- mation, refer to Phone and text message settings in this section.

Call History Select a phonebook name or phone number from the recent incoming, out- going or missed calls tabs. Touch a phonebook name or phone number listed to initiate the call.

Dial Number Enter the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. Touch the OK key on the screen to initi- ate the call.

For additional options to make a call, refer to Voice commands in this section.

Quick Dial Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly make a call. The system allows up to 20 entries to be stored. To set up a quick dial press the button on the control panel. Touch the Quick Dial key to display a list of quick dial entries. Touch the Edit key to edit current entries or touch the Add New key to make a new entry. Two methods are given to create a quick dial entry: Touch the Copy from Call History key to

save a phone number from the Incoming, Outgoing or Missed call history lists. Se- lect the person or phone number from the menu to be added. A registration menu will display the Entry #, phone num- ber, phone number type stored in the cel- lular phone and Voice Tag. Touch the OK key.

Touch the Copy from Phonebook key to save a number from the phonebook. Use the scroll keys on the side to move up and down through the menu. Select a person to be added. A menu will display the Entry #, phone number, phone number type stored in the cellular phone and Voice Tag. Touch the OK key.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Voice tag A voice tag can be recorded for each of the registered Quick Dial numbers and can be used to dial the number by speaking it. On the Quick Dial registration screen, touch the Voice Tag key. Select a relationship from the list or create a new voice tag. To record a new voice tag touch the Custom- ize key on the screen then touch the Store key. Speak a name after the prompt, the new tag will be stored. To edit or create a new voice tag touch the Customize key again. Touch the Play key to play the re- corded voice tag, touch the Restore key to edit the voice tag or Delete to delete the current voice tag.

RECEIVING A CALL When a call is received by the phone con- nected to the vehicles Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System, the call information is displayed on the control panel display. Press the button on the steering wheel or touch the Answer key on the screen to accept the call. To reject the call touch the Decline key on the screen.

If the user is not able to answer the call right away, touch the Hold Call key dis- played on the screen. A message will be played for the caller: Im not able to take a call right now. The user may then accept the call when available or reject the call. To reject a call, press and hold the button on the steering wheel.

DURING A CALL While a call is active the following options will appear on the control panel display: Mute

Touch this key to mute or unmute the system.

Dial Number Touch this key to dial digits during the phone call.

Use Handset Touch this key to transfer the call to the handset. To transfer the call back from the handset to the Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System, press the but- ton on the control panel then select the Transfer Hands-free key on the screen.

Switch Call

This option will only be available when a second call is active.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting functionality. If a call is received while another call is al- ready active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Press the button on the steering wheel or touch the Answer key on screen to accept the in- coming call. Touch the Decline key on the screen to reject the second call.

While a call is active, press the button on the steering wheel to access additional options. Speak one of the following com- mands: Send Digits

Speak this command followed by the dig- its to enter digits during the phone call.

Switch call Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the original call.

ENDING A CALL To end an active call, press the button on the steering wheel or touch the Hang up key on the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) WARNING

Laws in some jurisdictions may re- strict the use of Text-to-Speech. Check local regulations before using this feature.

Laws in some jurisdictions may re- strict the use of some of the applica- tions and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local regulations for any requirements.

Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe loca- tion. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme cau- tion at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full atten- tion to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if the connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phones owners manual for details and instructions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per- mission to enable text messaging. Check the phones screen during Bluetooth pairing. For some phones, you may need to enable Notifications in the phones Bluetooth menu for text messages to appear on the headunit. For additional information, refer to your phones own- ers manual. Text message integration requires that the phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiv- ing and sending text messages. Some phones may not support all text mes- saging features. Please refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat- ibility information, as well as your de- vices owners manual.

The system allows for the sending and re- ceiving of text messages through the ve- hicle interface. The availability of the text message func- tion may vary depending on the cellular phone. When the cellular phone connected to the vehicle receives a text message, a notifica- tion will appear on the control panel dis- play. To check the message, touch the Read key. Touch the Ignore key to save the message to be checked later. Access text messaging through the ve- hicles Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone or through the vehicles control panel.

Text messaging using Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped) Sending a text message (if so equipped) 1. Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say Send Text after the tone.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the following:

Phonebook Quick Dial Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls Dial

4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Nine predefined messages are avail- able. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following after the tone:

Driving, can't text Call me On my way Running late Okay Yes No Where are you? When?

Reading a received text message 1. Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say Read Text after the tone. The display will show a list of 20 messages with the sender and delivery time. Touch the Next key on the screen to view all mes- sages. To view a text message press the

button on the steering wheel and speak the number item list on the screen. The following options will be available: Play

Speak this command to have the system say the message.

Reply Speak this command to send a text mes- sage response to the sender of the text message.

Call Speak this command to call the sender.

Previous Speak this command to move to the pre- vious text message (if available).

Next Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available).

Siri Eyes Free (if so equipped) If a connected phone is equipped with Siri, it can also be used to create custom mes- sages that are sent through the phone. For additional information, refer to Siri Eyes Free in this section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones, text messages can only be sent through Siri.

Text messaging using the control panel Display received message list 1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the Text Message key on the screen

3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply to the message.

Up to 100 messages can be stored in the message list.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

Received message screen Touching the Read key on the incoming message notification screen or selecting a message from the message list will show the details of the received message on the display. Available actions: Prev.

Touch this key to read the previous mes- sage.

Next Touch this key to read the next message.

Play/Stop Touch the Play key to have the hands- free phone system read out the received message. Touch the Stop key to stop reading.

Call If the sender of the message is registered in the phonebook, touch the Call key to make a call to the sender.

Reply A reply message can be selected from the predefined list.

Sending a text message (if so equipped) This function may not be supported de- pending on the cellular phone. 1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the Text Message key on the screen.

3. Touch the Create Message key on the screen.

The following items are available:

Available item Action To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the OK key to confirm.

Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list. Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook. Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history.

Select Text Touch to display a list of predefined text messages. Send Touch to send the message.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH CONNECTIONS SCREEN 1. (back) key 2. Bluetooth tab 3. Connections screen 4. Add New key 5. (settings) key 6. (info) key 7. (Bluetooth Audio connection)

key 8. (Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone

System connection) key

Access the Connections screen to change settings and view Bluetooth information. To access the Connections screen press the MENU button on the control panel. Touch the Connections key on the screen then select the Bluetooth tab. The paired phone will be added to the list on the Bluetooth connections screen. Touching the name of another device on the list will switch the connected device.

(back) key

Touch the key to go back to the previous screen.

Connecting Bluetooth For additional information on connecting a cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, refer to Con- necting procedure in this section.

NOTE:

Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a differ- ent location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Bluetooth tab This tab will display up to six Bluetooth devices. If six devices are already con- nected, one of the devices must be deleted before another device can be connected.

Add New key Touch the Add New key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth device. For ad- ditional information, refer to Connecting procedure in this section.

(Bluetooth settings) key

Touch the key on the screen to display a list of options. Bluetooth

Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth connection on or off

Favorite (Connection first) Touch this key to change which device will be connected first when multiple de- vices are connected to the vehicle. Turn the key on or off to make the device a favorite connection. Turn the key on or off to make the device a favorite connection.

LHA4716

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

Pin Touch this key to customize the PIN code. Input a four digit number then touch the OK key. The new PIN will be set.

(info) key

Touch the key on the screen to display the information of the cellular phone or to delete the device. Touch the Delete key to remove a paired device then select Yes when a message appears.

(Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System connection) key A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the key next to the name to connect a device to the Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the device. The device will not be removed from the list. For additional information on removing a device, refer to (info) key in this section.

(Bluetooth Audio connection) key A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the key next to the name to connect a device to Bluetooth Audio. If the device is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the de- vice. The device will not be removed from the list. For additional information on re- moving a device, refer to (info) key in this section.

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE SETTINGS Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System set- tings can be changed according to the us- ers preference. To access the Phone set- tings menu press the MENU button on the control panel. Touch the Settings key then touch the Phone key.

LHA4721

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The following options are available:

Menu Item Result Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to Quick dial in this section.

Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial. Phonebook Download Entire Phone-

book All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phones owners manual.

Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected. Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off.

Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off. Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off. Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off. Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages.

Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset. Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.

Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Volume & beeps There are several methods to customize the volume settings. Volume & Beeps The Volume & Beeps screen can be found by pressing the MENU button on the control panel, touching the Settings key on the screen and selecting Volume & Beeps. To adjust the volume of the follow- ing options, touch the - and + keys on the screen. The available settings are: Ringtone

Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.

Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.

Voice Prompt Vol. Adjust the volume level of the system voice.

Text-to-speech Vol. Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging.

Button Beeps Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations.

Volume Settings The Volume settings screen can be found by pressing the button on the control panel then touching the Volume key on the screen. To adjust the volume of the following options, touch the - and + keys on the screen. The available settings are: Ringtone

Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.

Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.

Made for iPod, Made for iPhone and Made for iPad mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respec- tively, and has been certified by the devel- oper to meet Apple performance stan- dards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wire- less performance. iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod Nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

iPod/IPHONE

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-12 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-16 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-26 LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-30 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-34 BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-42 RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (if so equipped) . . 5-54 RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60

AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . .5-80 I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-88 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-90 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-90

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Intelligent Driver Alertness system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-100 Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Chassis Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103 Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104 Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-105

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106 How to enable/disable the sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108 Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109

System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-112

WARNING

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assis- tance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from slid- ing or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- den stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless car- bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause uncon- sciousness or death.

If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the ve- hicle inspected immediately.

Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the en- gine running for any extended length of time.

Keep the rear vent windows, lift- gates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, oth- erwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compart- ment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precau- tions: 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

If electrical wiring or other cable con- nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involv- ing damage to the exhaust sys- tem, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission con- trol device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING

The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's abil- ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if no- ticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are de- tected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damag- ing the three-way catalyst.

Do not race the engine while warm- ing it up.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as pos- sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain cor- rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi- nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illu- minated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- tion indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ing the installation of replacement or alter- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

Starting and driving 5-5

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Additional information: When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as a spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

The TPMS will activate only when the ve- hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).

The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- flated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The Tire Pressure Low Add Air or CHECK TIRE PRES warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pres- sure warning light remains illuminated.

The Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information dis- play, or the CHECK TIRE PRES warning appears in the trip computer when the low tire pressure warning light is illumi- nated and low tire pressure is detected. The Tire Pressure Low Add Air or CHECK TIRE PRES warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

The Tire Pressure Low Add Air or CHECK TIRE PRES warning does not ap- pear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunc- tion.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicles opera- tion and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving be- cause the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.

The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver's door opening.

You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position.

For additional information, refer to Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

5-6 Starting and driving

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sud- den steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal in- jury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres- sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, refer to Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire.)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could af- fect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pres- sure sensors.

CAUTION

The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor re- ception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem- porarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. Some examples are: Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle. If a transmitter set to similar frequencies

is being used in or near the vehicle. If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases: If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and

tire without TPMS. If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered. If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-7

FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the ve- hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- ommended COLD tire pressure. Vehicle set-up 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion. Do not start the engine.

Operation 1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire. If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When

the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.

If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not oper- ating.

The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire Alert under the following condi- tions: If there is interference from an exter-

nal device or transmitter. The air pressure from the inflation

device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

There is a malfunction in the TPMS. There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators. The identification code of the tire

pressure sensor is not registered to the system.

The battery of the tire pressure sen- sor is low.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not oper- ate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

5-8 Starting and driving

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve- hicles. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allow- ing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satis- factorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll- over crash, an unbelted person is signifi- cantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the in- fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- scription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- tem section of this manual, and also in- struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure be- low. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Do not apply the brakes. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac- celerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road sur- face until vehicle speed is reduced.

Starting and driving 5-9

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow-out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- dling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows-out while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- sure, the vehicle will generally move or pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this situation, losing control of the ve- hicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. To help avoid loss of control: Do not rapidly apply the brakes. Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal. Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac- celerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo- cation off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional infor- mation, refer to Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco- hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood- stream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an ac- cident, alcohol can increase the sever- ity of the injury.

5-10 Starting and driving

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- ever, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thou- sands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo- cal laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alco- hol. Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button igni- tion switch while driving the vehicle ex- cept in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 sec- onds.) If the engine stops while the ve- hicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate. If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position, push the ignition switch center: Once to change to ON. Two times to change to OFF. The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed. If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.

LSD2645

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-11

Some indicators and warnings for opera- tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are pres- ent near the operating location, the Intelli- gent Key systems operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even some- one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the en- gine.

The operating range of the engine start function is inside of the vehicle O1 . The luggage area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.

If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in- strument panel, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.

If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK (Normal parking position) The ignition switch can only be locked in this position. The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key. The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

LSD2020

5-12 Starting and driving

ON (Normal operating position) This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories. ON has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF posi- tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions: The shift lever is in P (Park). The hazard lamps are off. The turn signals are off. The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following occur: The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position. The ignition switch changes position. The hazard lamps are turned on. The turn signals are turned on.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the igni- tion switch in the ON or AUTO ACC posi- tion when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

OFF The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. AUTO ACC: With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition switch placed from the ON to the OFF po- sition, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the drivers door is opened. After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System may be restarted by pressing the POWER button/VOLUME con- trol knob or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, refer to Monitor, cli- mate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems in this manual.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the follow- ing procedure: Rapidly push the ignition switch three

consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec- onds, or

Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure: 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-13

(After step 3 is performed, when the ig- nition switch is pushed without de- pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ON.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depress- ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE: When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator ap- pears in the vehicle information dis- play (if so equipped) even when the In- telligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the In- telligent Key battery discharge indica- tor, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.

If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional in- formation, refer to Battery replace- ment in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS) (if so equipped) The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered NATS key. If the engine does not start by using the registered NATS key, it may be due to inter- ference caused by: Another NATS key. An automated toll road device. An automated payment device. Other devices that transmit similar sig-

nals. Start the engine using the following proce- dure: 1. Remove any items that may be causing

the interference away from the NATS key.

2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion for approximately 5 seconds.

3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. Start the engine.

6. Repeat the steps above until all possible interferences are eliminated.

If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the regis- tered NATS key separate from other de- vices to avoid interference.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto- mated toll road device or automatic pay- ment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the de- vice (which may have caused the inter- ference) separate from the registered key.

5-14 Starting and driving

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

Check that all windows and lights are clean.

Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust headrests/head

restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers

to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. For additional information, refer to Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu- tral). P (Park) is recommended. The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- tion. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine. To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while de- pressing the brake pedal with the igni- tion switch in any position. If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re- starting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the en- gine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-15

If the engine is very hard to start be- cause it is flooded, depress the accel- erator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking the en- gine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up: Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shut- ting it off. Starting and stopping the en- gine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situa- tions that can lead to potential bat- tery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat- tery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped) Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi- tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps: 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on

you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.

For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

5-16 Starting and driving

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Do not downshift abruptly on slip- pery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an acci- dent or damage the transmission.

CAUTION

Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driv- ing. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

To avoid possible damage to your ve- hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the ve- hicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the fol- lowing pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driv- ing enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re- duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. This Continuously Variable Transmis- sion is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shift- ing from P (Park) to any driving posi- tion while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-17

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) position. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Do not downshift abruptly on slip- pery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an acci- dent or damage the transmission.

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your ve- hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the ve- hicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driv- ing. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

Shifting To move the shift lever:

Press the button OA while depress- ing the brake pedal

Press the button OA to shift

Shift without pressing the button OA

LSD2643

5-18 Starting and driving

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift le- ver is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpect- edly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the ve- hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be de- pressed in to move the shift lever from P (Park) or the shift lever button pressed in from N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral) Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- gaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive) Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low) Use this position for engine braking on steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.

Starting and driving 5-19

Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed. It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged. For additional infor- mation, refer to Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.

To move the shift lever, complete the fol- lowing procedure: 1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a small (1/8 inch or 3 mm) flat-head screwdriver, remove the shift lock re- lease cover. If available, a plastic trim tool can also

be used.

4. Insert the rod from the spare tire tool kit into the shift lock release slot and push in at an angle (about 45). A small screw- driver or small trim tool may also be used. For additional information, refer to

NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre- driving checks and adjustments sec- tion of this manual.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.

6. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- tion. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have the transmission checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Make sure to take extra care during the removal of the shift lock cap as this part is easily damaged.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is de- pressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and oth- ers.

LSD2644

5-20 Starting and driving

Drive sport mode switch (if so equipped) To select the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position. The drive sport mode indicator in the ve- hicle information display illuminates next to the Transmission Shift Position indicator. To turn off the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch again. The drive sport mode indicator will turn off. When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode will be automatically turned off.

OFF position: For normal driving and fuel economy, use the OFF position. ON position: For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking is necessary, or for powerful acceleration, use the ON position. The transmission will automatically select a dif- ferent gear ratio, allowing the engine to provide high output. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the drive sport mode in the ON position. This re- duces fuel economy.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF mode switch (if so equipped) To select the overdrive OFF mode, push the O/D OFF switch with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position. The overdrive OFF indicator light in the me- ter panel illuminates. To turn off the over- drive OFF mode, push the O/D OFF switch again. The overdrive OFF indicator light will turn off. When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the over- drive OFF mode will be automatically turned off.

LSD2647 LSD2647

Starting and driving 5-21

OFF position: For normal driving and fuel economy, use the OFF position. ON position: For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking is necessary, or for powerful acceleration, use the ON position. The transmission will automatically select a dif- ferent gear ratio, allowing the engine to provide high output. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the over- drive OFF mode in the ON position. This reduces fuel economy.

Accelerator downshift in D (Drive) position For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid tem- perature protection mode. If the fluid tem- perature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high tem-

peratures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- creased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelera- tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.

Fail-safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional infor- mation, refer to Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual. This will oc- cur even if all electrical circuits are func- tioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch back to the ON position. The ve- hicle should return to its normal operat- ing condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro- tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- curs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could in- crease the chance of a collision. Be es- pecially careful when driving. If neces- sary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to re- turn to normal operation, or have it re- paired if necessary.

5-22 Starting and driving

WARNING

Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.

Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

To engage: Pull the lever up OA . To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, press the button and lower completely OB .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn- ing light goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. This system is only a warning device

to inform the driver of a potential un- intended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

WSD0169 LSD3632

PARKING BRAKE LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

Starting and driving 5-23

The LDW system will operate when the ve- hicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The LDW system monitors the lane mark- ers on the traveling lane using the camera unit OA located above the inside mirror. The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, refer to LDW system operation in this section.

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION 1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica-

tor or Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light

2 Vehicle Information Display or Trip Computer

3 LDW Switch (if so equipped)

LSD3694

5-24 Starting and driving

The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches ei- ther the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (if so equipped) on the in- strument panel will blink to alert the driver. The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD3675

Starting and driving 5-25

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Lane and press the OK button.

3. Select Lane Departure Warning and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the LDW switch (if so equipped): 1. Push the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

switch to turn the LDW system on.

2. Push the LDW switch again to turn the LDW system off.

When the LDW system is turned on, the indicator light on the LDW switch illumi- nates.

LSD3676

5-26 Starting and driving

LSD3677

Starting and driving 5-27

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could re- sult in serious injury or death. The system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly: During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.). When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow. When driving on winding or un-

even roads. When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs. When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane. When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstan- dard wheels).

When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or sus- pension parts.

When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.

The system may not function prop- erly under the following conditions: On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane mark- ers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane mark- ers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with wa- ter, dirt, snow, etc.

On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

On roads where there are sharp curves.

On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shad- ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

When the vehicles traveling direc- tion does not align with the lane marker.

When traveling close to the ve- hicle in front of you, which ob- structs the lane camera unit de- tection range.

When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

5-28 Starting and driving

When a sudden change in bright- ness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104F [40C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deacti- vated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle infor- mation display (if so equipped): Unavail- able: High Cabin Temperature. When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating au- tomatically. The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions: When you operate the lane change signal

and change traveling lanes in the direc- tion of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can- cel automatically. The LDW indicator (or- ange) or LDW indicator light will illuminate in the instrument panel. If the LDW indicator (orange) or LDW indicator light illuminates in the instrument panel, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange) or LDW indicator light continues to illumi- nate, have the LDW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The lane camera unit OA for the LDW sys- tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW sys- tem and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: Always keep the windshield clean. Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

LSD3502

Starting and driving 5-29

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera units capability of detecting the lane markers.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death. The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the di- rection your vehicle will move to en- sure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors O1

installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

LSD3090

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

5-30 Starting and driving

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detec- tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec- tion zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and ap- proximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

SSD1030 Detection zone

Starting and driving 5-31

LSD3678 LSD3679

5-32 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW Indicator or BSW Indicator Light

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION The BSW system operates above approxi- mately 20 mph (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica- tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected ve- hicle leaves the detection zone. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi- nates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi- cator light is adjusted automatically de- pending on the brightness of the ambient light. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For addi- tional information, refer to BSW driving situations in this section.

Starting and driving 5-33

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Blind Spot and press the OK button.

3. Select Blind Spot Warning and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the BSW switch (if so equipped): 1. Push the BSW switch to turn the BSW

system on. The BSW indicator light will illuminate in the meter.

2. Push the BSW switch again to turn the BSW system off. The BSW indicator light will turn off.

LSD3680

5-34 Starting and driving

NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system,

the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.

When the BSW system is turned on, the BSW indicator (white) in the vehicle in- formation display (if so equipped) illu- minates.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death. The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions. The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when cer- tain objects are present such as: Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.

Oncoming vehicles.

LSD3681

Starting and driving 5-35

Vehicles remaining in the detec- tion zone when you accelerate from a stop.

A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.

A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.

A vehicle which your vehicle over- takes rapidly.

A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.

When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

The radar sensors detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect ve- hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv- ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen- sors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.

The radar sensors are designed to ig- nore most stationary objects, how- ever objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may oc- casionally be detected. This is a nor- mal operation condition.

The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: Severe weather Road spray Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install acces- sories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle win- dow) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

LSD2299 Illustration 1 Approaching from behind

5-36 Starting and driving

Another vehicle approaching from behind Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de- tection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE: The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2300 Illustration 2 Approaching from

behind

Starting and driving 5-37

Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu- minates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap- proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE: When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are travel- ing close together.

The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302 Illustration 3 Overtaking another

vehicle

LSD2303 Illustration 4 Overtaking another

vehicle

5-38 Starting and driving

Entering from the side Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu- minates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE: If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

The radar sensors may not detect a ve- hicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it en- ters the detection zone.

LSD2305 Illustration 5 Entering from the side

LSD2308 Illustration 6 Entering from the side

Starting and driving 5-39

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the sys- tem will be deactivated automatically. The Side Radar Obstruction warning message will appear in the vehicle information dis- play (if so equipped). The system is not available until the condi- tions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- tion may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen- sors. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Malfunction If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped).

LSD3682

5-40 Starting and driving

Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- sage continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- dar sensors clean. The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the radar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- ent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for

LSD3090

Starting and driving 5-41

compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For Canada Applicable law: Canada 310 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25GHz Output power: less than 20 milliwatts Droit applicable: Canada 310 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suiv- antes: 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de frquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz Puissance mise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the RCTA could result in serious injury or death. The RCTA system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent con- tact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, al- ways use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de- signed to detect other vehicles approach- ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

5-42 Starting and driving

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approxi- mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approach- ing from.

LSD3683

Starting and driving 5-43

LSD3684

5-44 Starting and driving

The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1

installed on both sides near the rear bum- per to detect an approaching vehicle. The radar sensors O1 can detect an ap- proaching vehicle from up to approxi- mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

LSD2216

LSD3090

Starting and driving 5-45

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Parking Aids and press the OK button.

3. Select Cross Traffic and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the BSW switch (if so equipped): 1. Push the BSW switch to turn the RCTA

system on. The BSW indicator light will illuminate in the meter.

2. Push the BSW switch again to turn the RCTA system off. The BSW indicator light will turn off.

LSD3699

5-46 Starting and driving

NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3681

Starting and driving 5-47

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: Pedestrians, bicycles, motor-

cycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles

A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)

A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)

The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situ- ations: Illustration OA : When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

Illustration OB : When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.

Illustration OC : When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.

Illustration OD : When an ap- proaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.

LSD3195

5-48 Starting and driving

Illustration OE : When the angle formed by your vehicle and ap- proaching vehicle is small.

The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: Severe weather Road spray Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install acces- sories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will in- terfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach- ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo- site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system af- ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

LSD2043 Illustration 1

LSD2044 Illustration 2

Starting and driving 5-49

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the sys- tem will be deactivated automatically. The Side Radar Obstruction warning message will appear in the vehicle information dis- play (if so equipped). The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the radar sensors. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Malfunction When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system mal- function warning message will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).

LSD3682

5-50 Starting and driving

Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- sage continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- dar sensors clean. The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the radar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- ent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

LSD3090

Starting and driving 5-51

For Canada Applicable law: Canada 310 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause un- desired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25GHz Output power: less than 20 milliwatts Droit applicable: Canada 310 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de frquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz Puissance mise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL 1 RES+ switch

2 CANCEL switch

3 SET- switch

4 CRUISE ON/OFF switch If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it cancels automatically. To properly set the cruise control system,

use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv- ing under the following conditions: When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed. In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed. On winding or hilly roads. On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.). In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.LSD3131

CRUISE CONTROL

5-52 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with- out keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indica- tor light or indicator in the instrument panel comes on. To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- hicle to the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light or indicator in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the ac- celerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- ously set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods: Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE indi-

cator light or indicator in the instru- ment panel goes out.

Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indicator light or indicator goes out.

Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light or indicator in the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and the CRUISE indicator light or indi- cator in the instrument panel goes out if: You depress the brake pedal while push-

ing the RES+ or SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET switch.

Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, re- lease the switch.

Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it.

Push and hold the SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

Push and release the SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle re- turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-53

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.

The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replace- ment for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB sys- tem. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in con- trol of the vehicle at all times.

There is a limitation to the RAB sys- tem capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations.

The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle. The RAB system detects obstacles behind the vehicle using the parking sensors O1

located on the rear bumper.

NOTE:

You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB sys- tem will continue to operate. For addi- tional information, please refer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in this section.

RAB SYSTEM OPERATION 1 RAB system warning light and RAB sys-

tem warning indicator

2 Center display

3 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

4 Drive Systems OFF Switch (if so equipped)

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates. If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.

NOTE: The brake lights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the RAB system.

When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

LSD3633

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) (if so equipped)

5-54 Starting and driving

LSD3517 LSD3686

Starting and driving 5-55

TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system on or off. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. Select Rear and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The RAB system is automatically

enabled.

2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the RAB system.

When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. LSD3522

5-56 Starting and driving

RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. When the vehicle approaches an ob-

stacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic envi- ronment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary.

If it is necessary to override RAB op- eration, strongly press the accelera- tor pedal.

LSD3687

Starting and driving 5-57

Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you be- fore and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following ob- jects: Moving objects Low objects Narrow objects Wedge-shaped objects Objects close to the bumper (less

than approximately 1 ft [30 cm]) Objects that suddenly appear Thin objects such as rope, wire,

chain, etc. The RAB system may not operate for

the following obstacles: Obstacles located high off the

ground Obstacles in a position offset from

your vehicle Obstacles, such as spongy materi-

als or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave

The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions: There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc.,

attached to the sonar sensors. A loud sound is heard in the area

around the vehicle. The surface of the obstacle is di-

agonal to the rear of the vehicle. The RAB system may unintentionally

operate in the following conditions: There is overgrown grass in the

area around the vehicle. There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll

gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.

There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.

The vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.

There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.

An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicles sonar, is near the vehicle.

Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle.

The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently: The vehicle is driven in bad

weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). The vehicle is driven on a steep

hill. The vehicles posture is changed

(e.g., when driving over a bump). The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road. The vehicle is turned sharply by

turning the steering wheel fully. Snow chains are used. Wheels or tires other than NISSAN

recommended are used. The brakes are cold at low ambi-

ent temperatures or immediately after driving has started.

5-58 Starting and driving

The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.

Turn the RAB system off in the follow- ing conditions to prevent the occur- rence of an unexpected accident re- sulting from sudden system operation: The vehicle is towed. The vehicle is carried on a flatbed

truck. The vehicle is on the chassis

dynamometer. The vehicle drives on an uneven

road surface. Suspension parts other than

those designated as Genuine NISSAN parts are used. (If the ve- hicle height or the vehicle body in- clination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)

Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, and the RAB sys- tem warning light will illuminate in the ve- hicle information display. Action to take If the warning light illuminates, park the ve- hicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB sys- tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system: Always keep the parking sensors O1

clean. If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them

off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.

LSD3633

Starting and driving 5-59

Do not subject the area around the park- ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and pe- ripheral areas are deformed in an acci- dent, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on the parking sensors O1 and their sur- rounding areas. This may cause a mal- function or improper operation.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the AEB system could result in serious injury or death. The AEB system is a supplemental

aid to the driver. It is not a replace- ment for the drivers attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent acci- dents due to carelessness or danger- ous driving techniques.

The AEB system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.

The AEB system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The AEB system uses a radar sensor OA

located on the front of the vehicle to mea- sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD2710

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (if so equipped)

5-60 Starting and driving

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so

equipped)

2. AEB emergency warning indicator (if so equipped)

3. AEB system warning light The AEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi- mately 3 mph (5 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will provide an initial warn- ing to the driver by both a visual (if so equipped) and audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB system detects that there is still the possi- bility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual warning (red) (if so equipped) and audible warning and also applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB system applies harder braking au- tomatically.

LSD3688

Starting and driving 5-61

NOTE:

The vehicle's brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a colli- sion, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accel- erating or braking, the AEB system will function later or will not function. The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: When the steering wheel is turned as far

as necessary to avoid a collision. When the accelerator pedal is depressed. When there is no longer a vehicle de-

tected ahead. If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD3689

5-62 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the AEB system on or off. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. Select Front and press the OK button.

LSD3522

Starting and driving 5-63

For vehicles with the Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The AEB system is automatically

enabled.

2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the AEB system.

When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE: The AEB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD3687

5-64 Starting and driving

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death. The AEB system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions. The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects: Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway. Oncoming vehicles. Crossing vehicles.

The radar sensor has some perfor- mance limitations. If a stationary ve- hicle is in the vehicles path, the AEB system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over ap- proximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor. Interference by other radar

sources. Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles. If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.,

motorcycle). When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves. In some road or traffic conditions, the

AEB system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

Braking distances increase on slip- pery surfaces.

The system is designed to automati- cally check the sensors functionality, within certain limitations. The sys- tem may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-65

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interfer- ence from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically. Condition B When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak- ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the Front Radar Obstruc- tion warning message will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).

LSD3691

5-66 Starting and driving

Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Mal- function] will appear in the vehicle informa- tion display (if so equipped). Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- ing light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.

LSD3602

Starting and driving 5-67

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The sensor OA is located on the front of the vehicle. To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor. Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice For USA This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful in- terference when the equipment is oper- ated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- ate radio frequency energy and, if not in- stalled and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful in- terference to radio communications. Op- eration of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own ex- pense. Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor- mation: This equipment complies with FCC radia- tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- trolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other an- tenna or transmitter.

LSD2710

5-68 Starting and driving

For Canada This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device must not cause interference,

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Lexploitation est autorise aux deux condi- tions suivantes: 1. lappareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnnement.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the drivers attention to traffic condi- tions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driv- ing, traffic, weather and road conditions.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle OB to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De- tection system uses a camera installed be- hind the windshield OA in addition to the radar sensor.

LSD3634

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-69

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so

equipped)

2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer- gency warning indicator (if so equipped)

3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pe- destrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 6 37 mph (10 60 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection in- dicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- tem detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will auto- matically increase the braking force.

LSD3688

5-70 Starting and driving

If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and an audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system ap- plies harder braking automatically. While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly.

NOTE:

The vehicles brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the sys- tem may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the conse- quences if a collision should be unavoid- able. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function.LSD3689

Starting and driving 5-71

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: When the steering wheel is turned to

avoid a collision. When the accelerator pedal is depressed. When there is no longer a vehicle or a

pedestrian detected ahead. If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. Select Front and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the Drive Systems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem is automatically enabled.

2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the AEB with Pedestrian De- tection system.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system warning light illumi- nates.

NOTE: The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

5-72 Starting and driving

LSD3522 LSD3687

Starting and driving 5-73

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limita- tions could result in serious injury or death. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following objects: Small pedestrians (including

small children), animals and cyclists.

Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us- ing mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards.

Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position.

Oncoming vehicles Crossing vehicles Obstacles on the roadside

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the ve-

hicles path, the AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approxi- mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

For pedestrian detection, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approxi- mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestri- ans in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the ve- hicle ahead is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the speed difference between the two vehicles is too small.

The radar sensor AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: Poor visibility (conditions such as

rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand- storms, and road spray from other vehicles)

Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road.

If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area.

Interference by other radar sources.

The camera area of the windshield is fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

5-74 Starting and driving

Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming ve- hicles) enters the front camera. Strong light causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see.

A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)

The poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.

The pedestrians profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable due to the pedestrian transporting lug- gage, wearing bulky or very loose- fitting clothing or accessories.

The system performance may de- grade in the following conditions: The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road. The vehicle is driven on a slope. Excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunk room of your vehicle.

The system is designed to automati- cally check the sensors (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not de- tect blockage of sensor areas cov- ered by ice, snow or stickers, for ex- ample. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.

In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply par- tial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-75

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A: In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: The radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source. The camera area of the windshield is

misted or frozen. Strong light is shining from the front. The cabin temperature is over approxi-

mately 104F (40C) in direct sunlight. The camera area of the windshield glass

is continuously covered with dirt, etc. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.

LSD3691

5-76 Starting and driving

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Condition B: When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the AEB system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the Front Radar Obstruction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). Action to take: If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the Front Radar Obstruction warning mes- sage continues to be displayed in the ve- hicle information display (if so equipped), have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3602

Starting and driving 5-77

Condition C When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the Front Radar Obstruction message in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). Action to take: When the above driving conditions no lon- ger exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE: If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the I-FCW sys- tem will also stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto- matically, a chime will sound, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).

Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- ing light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle OB . The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield OA . To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to ob- serve the following: Always keep the sensor areas of the front

bumper and windshield clean. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensors (e.g., bumper, wind- shield).

LSD3634

5-78 Starting and driving

Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction.

Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability.

Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment. For Canada Model: ARS4B IC: 4135A-ARS4B FCC ID: OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera- tion is subject to the following two con- ditions: 1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure in- formation: This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-79

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or death. The I-FCW system can help warn the

driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driv- ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane. The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor OA

located on the front of the vehicle to mea- sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so

equipped)

2. AEB system warning light

LSD2710

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

5-80 Starting and driving

LSD3692 LSD3604

Starting and driving 5-81

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward colli- sion, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection in- dicator in the vehicle information display (if so equipped), and sounding an audible alert.

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF. For vehicles equipped with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. Select Front and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles equipped with the Drive Sys- tems OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The I-FCW system is automatically

enabled.

2. Push the Drive Systems OFF switch once to disable the I-FCW system.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

LSD2263

5-82 Starting and driving

LSD3522 LSD3687

Starting and driving 5-83

NOTE: The I-FCW system will be automatically

turned on when the engine is re- started.

The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system (if so equipped). There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW sys- tem. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death. The I-FCW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions. The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects: Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway Oncoming vehicles Crossing vehicles

(Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: Snow or heavy rain Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor. Interference by other radar

sources.

LSD2312 Illustration A

5-84 Starting and driving

Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.

Driving in a tunnel (Illustration B) When the vehicle

ahead is being towed. (Illustration C) When the distance

to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.

(Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

The system is designed to automati- cally check the sensors functionality, within certain limitations. The sys- tem may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

LSD2265 Illustration B

Starting and driving 5-85

LSD2266 Illustration C

5-86 Starting and driving

LSD2313 Illustration D

Starting and driving 5-87

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interfer- ence from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automati- cally. Condition B When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak- ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off.

LSD3691

5-88 Starting and driving

The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the Front Radar Obstruc- tion warning message will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light (orange) and display the Front Radar Obstruction message in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the AEB system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.

LSD3602

Starting and driving 5-89

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB system warning light (or- ange) will illuminate and the warning mes- sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- ing light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor OA is located behind the lower grille of the front bumper. To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor. Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

LSD2710

5-90 Starting and driving

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Radio frequency radiation exposure in- formation: This equipment complies with FCC radia- tion exposure limits set forth for an un- controlled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

For Canada Model: ARS4B IC: 4135A-ARS4B FCC ID: OAYARS4B This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit ac- cepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est suscep- tible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure in- formation: This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Cet quipement est conforme aux lim- ites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-91

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the I-DA system could result in serious injury or death. The IDA system is only a warning to

inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.

The IDA system does not detect and provide an alert of the drivers lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.

It is the drivers responsibility to: stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling

lane, be in control of the vehicle at all

times, avoid driving when tired, avoid distractions (texting, etc).

The IDA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driv- ing fatigue. The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the mes- sage Take a break? appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h). The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warn- ings per trip. The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from ON to OFF and back on.

LSD3545

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) (if so equipped)

5-92 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the IDA system. 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and press the OK button. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Driver Attention Alert and press the OK button.

NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3693

Starting and driving 5-93

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the IDA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death. The I-DA system may not operate

properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions: Poor road conditions such as an

uneven road surface or pot holes. Strong side wind. If you have adopted a sporty driv-

ing style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration.

Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed.

The IDA system will not provide an alert in the following conditions: Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph

(60 km/h). Short lapses of attention. Instantaneous distractions such

as dropping an object.

System malfunction If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning mes- sage will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically. Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the sys- tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to ob- tain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and re- duced engine performance.

Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

LSD3563

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-94 Starting and driving

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle. 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application Avoid rapid starts and stops. Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible. Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops. Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num- ber of stops.

Maintaining a steady speed can mini- mize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.

Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.

Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where le- gally allowed) can improve fuel effi- ciency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.

Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnec- essary braking.

Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.

Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady speed. Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 3060 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stop- ping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up Limit idling time to minimize impact to

fuel economy. Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef- fectively circulate the engine oil before driving.

Your vehicle will reach its ideal operat- ing temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos- sible.

When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-95

Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, refer to En- gine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer informa- tion section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed in P (Park). Fail- ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

SSD0488

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-96 Starting and driving

Do not leave children unattended in- side the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB O1 : Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB O2 : Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB O3 : Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK po- sition and remove the key.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine run- ning, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to oper- ate the steering wheel with light force. When the steering wheel is operated re- peatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power as- sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is re- duced, steering wheel operation will be- come heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal.

POWER STEERING

Starting and driving 5-97

Avoid repeating such steering wheel op- erations that could cause the power steer- ing system to overheat. You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction. If the power steering warning light illumi- nates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servic- ing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the power steering warning light illu- minates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. For additional information, refer to Power steering warning light in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

The brake system has two separate hy- draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- sure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerat- ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be lon- ger and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

BRAKE SYSTEM

5-98 Starting and driving

Parking brake break-in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking perfor- mance. This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain ve- hicle control during braking on slip- pery surfaces. Remember that stop- ping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal sur- faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- tances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the ve- hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Tire type and condition may also af- fect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four wheels.

When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For ad- ditional information, refer to Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer in- formation section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping dis- tances.

Self-test feature The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in- cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self- test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a mal- function. If the computer senses a mal- function, it switches the ABS off and illumi- nates the ABS warning light on the

Starting and driving 5-99

instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the ve- hicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- sure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- erating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are haz- ardous and extra care is required while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the ve- hicle at all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions: Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

Controls brake pressure and engine out- put to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).

Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased steering input)

Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- ing situations.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

5-100 Starting and driving

When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following: The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indi- cates that the VDC system is working properly.

Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

For additional information, refer to Slip in- dicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

indicator light comes on in the instru- ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on. The VDC OFF switch, or the vehicle infor- mation display, is used to turn off the VDC system. The indicator light and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys- tem warning light illuminate to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC OFF switch, or the vehicle information display, is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non-slipping drive wheel. The indicator light flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the indicator light will not flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position. The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- ture that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle for- ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driv- ing and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully.

Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- sion. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deterio- rated, the VDC system may not oper- ate properly. This could adversely af- fect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator light may flash or illuminate.

If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys- tem may not operate properly and the indicator light may illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-101

If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the indica- tor light may illuminate.

When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked cor- ners, the VDC system may not oper- ate properly and the indicator light may flash or illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator light may flash or illuminate. This is not a mal- function. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not oper- ate properly and the indicator light may flash or illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driv- ing and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully.

Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- sion. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deterio- rated, the VDC system may not oper- ate properly. This could adversely af- fect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator light may flash or illuminate.

If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys- tem may not operate properly and the indicator light may illuminate.

If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the indica- tor light may illuminate.

When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked cor- ners, the VDC system may not oper- ate properly and the indicator light may flash or illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator light may flash or illuminate. This is not a mal- function. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not oper- ate properly and the indicator light may flash or illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

5-102 Starting and driving

The chassis control is an electric control module that includes the following func- tions: Intelligent Trace Control Intelligent Engine Brake Active Ride Control

INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL (I-TC) This system senses driving based on the drivers steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.

The ITC can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle information display Chassis Control page. For addi- tional information, refer to Vehicle infor- mation display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC sys- tem, the ITC is also turned off. When the ITC is operated and the Chassis Control mode is selected in the vehicle in- formation display, the ITC graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Vehicle

information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

WARNING

The ITC may not be effective depend- ing on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the ITC is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the ITC is operating properly. Even if the ITC is set to OFF, some func- tions will remain on to assist the driver (for example, avoidance scenes).

INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB) The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration by controlling the Continuously Variable Transmission gear ratio, depending on the cornering condition calculated from driv- er's steering input and plural sensors. This benefit is for easier traceability and less workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners. The I-EB also adds subtle deceleration with gear ratio control according to drivers brake pedal operation.

LSD2185

CHASSIS CONTROL (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-103

The I-EB can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle information display Chassis Control page. For addi- tional information, refer to Vehicle infor- mation display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. When the I-EB is operated at corners and the Chassis Control mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the I-EB graph- ics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

WARNING

The I-EB may not be effective depend- ing on driving conditions. Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the I-EB is operating, the needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates that the I-EB is operating prop- erly.

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC) This system senses upper body motion based on wheel speed information and controls four wheel brake pressure to en- hance ride comfort in effort to restrain un- comfortable upper body movement. This system comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h). When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the ARC is also turned off. When the brake control of the ARC is oper- ated and the Chassis Control mode is se- lected in the vehicle information display, the ARC graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional infor- mation, refer to Vehicle information dis- play in the Instruments and controls sec- tion of this manual. When the ARC is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is normal and indicates that the ARC is oper- ating properly.

WARNING

Never rely solely on the hill start as- sist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Al- ways drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.

The hill start assist system is not de- signed to hold the vehicle at a stand- still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road condi- tions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the ve- hicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

5-104 Starting and driving

The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. The hill start assist system will operate au- tomatically under the following conditions: The transmission is shifted to a forward

or reverse gear. The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely. The hill start assist system will not operate when the transmission is shifted to the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road. When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) indicator light illuminates in the meter, the hill start assist system will not operate. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) indicator light in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper. When the DISPLAY key is on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the touch-screen display. An additional view of the sonar status will appear in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) for ref- erence.

WARNING

The RSS is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.

The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other ma- neuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.

Read and understand the limitations of the RSS as contained in this sec- tion. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate differ- ent distances to the object.

Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- fect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large station- ary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

LSD3247

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-105

The system is not designed to pre- vent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not de- tect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

The system may not detect the fol- lowing objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of ob- stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio sys- tem volume or an open vehicle win- dow) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION The system informs with a visual and au- dible alert of rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

RR Sensor Range Sound Display

R o o o Display/Beep when detect Display on camera view x No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec- onds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets away from the vehicle. When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

5-106 Starting and driving

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indi- cator OA appears. When the center of the vehicle moves close to an object, the cen- ter sonar indicator OB appears.

The system indicators OA will appear when the vehicle moves closer to an object.

LSD3246 LSD2137

Starting and driving 5-107

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system: For vehicles with the vehicle information display (if so equipped): 1. Press the button until Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select Driver As- sistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Parking Aids and press the OK button.

3. Select Sonar and press the OK button. Select Rear Sensor and press the OK

button to turn the sonar system on or off.

Select Display to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information dis- play when the sonar system activates.

Select Range to change the sonar system distance to Far, Mid or Near.

LSD3538

5-108 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the RSS OFF switch (if so equipped): 1. The RSS is automatically enabled when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse).

2. Push the RSS OFF switch once to disable the RSS. The indicator light on the RSS switch will not illuminate.

The RSS will automatically be turned on when the engine is restarted.

SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death. Read and understand the limitations

of the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar sys- tem; this may include reduced per- formance or a false activation.

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti- vated at lower speeds.LSD3539

Starting and driving 5-109

Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a trucks compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- fect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

The system is not designed to pre- vent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground.

The system may not detect the fol- lowing objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When sonar blockage is detected, the sys- tem will be deactivated automatically. The system is not available until the condi- tions no longer exist.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- tion may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sen- sors. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The sonar sensors O1 are located on the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean. The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the sonar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

LSD3633

5-110 Starting and driving

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- ent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the sonar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before in- serting it into the key hole or use the re- mote keyless entry function on the Intelli- gent Key.

ANTIFREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check the antifreeze to assure proper win- ter protection. For additional information, refer to Engine cooling system in the Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ- ing the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing engine coolant in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you oper- ate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some states, provinces and territories prohibit their use. Check local laws be- fore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-111

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- drifts.

Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield- washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or grip un- der these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or down- shifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steer- ing maneuvers.

Do not use the cruise control on slip- pery roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

PARKING BRAKE When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32F (0C), do not ap- ply the parking brake to prevent it from freezing. For safe parking: Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-

tion. Securely block the wheels.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting. The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20F (-7C) or lower.

WARNING

Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical sys- tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro- tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

5-112 Starting and driving

To use the engine block heater: 1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, de- pending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-113

MEMO

5-114 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emer- gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

Do not use the hazard warning flash- ers while moving on the highway un- less unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your ve- hicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position. Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the follow- ing procedure: Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning appears in the vehicle infor- mation display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For ad- ditional information, refer to Warning lights, indicator lights and audible remind- ers in the Instruments and controls sec- tion, and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sud- den steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal in- jury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres- sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving af- ter adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be mal- functioning. If you have a flat tire, re- place it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the ve- hicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could af- fect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pres- sure sensors.

If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:

Stopping the vehicle 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve- hicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure the parking brake is se- curely applied and the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted into P (Park).

Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

Never change tires if oncoming traf- fic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the ve- hicle may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2142

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

6-4 In case of emergency

Getting the spare tire and tools 1. Open the liftgate.

2. Lift the flaps on the wheel cover to ac- cess the spare tire.

3. Carefully remove the wheel cover to avoid potential damage to the side trim.

4. Remove the jacking rod OA , the jack OB , and wheel nut wrench OC from the stor- age cover OD .

5. Remove the storage cover OD to access the spare tire.

LCE2428 LCE2429 LCE2430

In case of emergency 6-5

6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.

7. Once loosened remove the bolt, and re- move the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not touch floor metal directly. Doing so could result in any burns.

Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod O1 as illustrated. Apply cloth O2 between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover. Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

SCE0913 SCE0630

6-6 In case of emergency

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

WARNING

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is nec- essary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is de- signed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the ve- hicle to move.

LPD2451

In case of emergency 6-7

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following in- structions. 1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the 2 notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown. The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ) until they are tight.

LCE2059 WCE0048

6-8 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 Nm) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recom- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres- sure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. 5. Securely store the jack and the tool kit in

its storage area.

6. Place the spare tire cover and liftgate floor carpeting over the jack and tool kit.

7. Securely store the damaged tire in the vehicle.

8. Close the liftgate.

WARNING

Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can be- come dangerous projectiles in an ac- cident or sudden stop.

The spare tire is designed for emer- gency use. For additional informa- tion, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING

If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with any- thing, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water.

Keep battery out of the reach of children.

The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-9

Whenever working on or near a bat- tery, always wear suitable eye pro- tectors (for example, goggles or in- dustrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.

The automatic engine cooling fan (if so equipped) may come on at any time without warning, even if the ig- nition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, keep hands and other objects away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause per- sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve- hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring their batteries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces- sary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Connect the jumper cables in the se- quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ).

CAUTION

Always connect positive (+) to posi- tive (+) and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) not to the battery.

Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

LCE2223

6-10 In case of emergency

4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

5. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ig- nition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

6. After starting the engine, carefully dis- connect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

CAUTION

Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models cannot be push- started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a (red) high temperature warning light (if so equipped)), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING

Do not continue to drive if your ve- hicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- ply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air condi- tioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the ra- diator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- ther until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radia- tor should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into con- tact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant res- ervoir with the engine running. Add cool- ant to the engine coolant reservoir, if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equip- ment could damage your vehicle. Towing in- structions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and proce- dures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a ser- vice operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.

Always attach safety chains before towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

For additional information, refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer in- formation section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi- tional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

Two-Wheel Drive models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or back- ward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmis- sion. If it is necessary to tow the ve- hicle with the rear wheels raised al- ways use towing dollies under the front wheels.

When towing CVT models with the rear wheels on the ground or on tow- ing dollies:

LCE2343

In case of emergency 6-13

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar de- vice. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: Contact a professional towing ser-

vice to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recov- ery procedure.

Tow chains or cables must be at- tached only to main structural mem- bers of the vehicle.

Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.

Only use devices specifically de- signed for vehicle recovery and fol- low the manufacturer's instructions.

Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the ve- hicle. Never pull at an angle.

Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle ex- cept the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device de- signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- ways follow the manufacturer's instruc- tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system .

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive). Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion. Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

Do not spin the tires above 34 mph (55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing ser- vice to remove the vehicle.

6-14 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can: After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain. After driving on coastal roads. When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.

When dust or mud builds up on the sur- face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve- hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- face when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

Do not concentrate water spray di- rectly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area.

Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle compo- nents, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to func- tion properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical de- tergents, gasoline or solvents.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There- fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- ered appearance before re-applying wax. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

Do not use a wax containing any abra- sives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol- ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid last- ing damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regu- larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspen- sion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- mal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win- dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- age the electrical conductors, radio an- tenna elements or rear window de- froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped) Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- cially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely re- move the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discolor- ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap- plied to the tires, it may react with the coat- ing and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

Appearance and care 7-3

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions: Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.

Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/ grooves (where it would be difficult to re- move).

Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com- pletely removed from the tire tread/ grooves.

Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- mended by the tire dressing manufac- turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped). Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classifi- cation sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and re- sult in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.

Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather (if so equipped) surfaces and should be re- moved promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, clean- ing fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leathers natural finish.

Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precau- tions: Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they con- tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior sur- face.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause im- mediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur- er's instructions before using the air fresh- eners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death: NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards.

Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat posi- tioning hook. For additional informa- tion, refer to "Floor mat installation" in this section.

Make sure the floor mat does not in- terfere with pedal operation.

Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.

After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular clean- ing and replaced if they become exces- sively worn.

Floor mat installation Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po- sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle.

LAI2105

Appearance and care 7-5

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following: 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter- fere with pedal operation. With the igni- tion still in the OFF position, the shift le- ver in the P (Park) position and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and re- lease all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com- pletely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to Seat belt maintenance in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may se- verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

LAI2106 Positioning hooks

7-6 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: The accumulation of moisture-retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those ar- eas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep

the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- bris from the passenger compart- ment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic com- ponents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

When performing any inspection or main- tenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- lowing are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the ve- hicle from moving. Move the shift le- ver to P (Park).

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when perform- ing any parts replacement or repairs.

If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

Always wear eye protection when- ever you work on your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an au- tomatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warn- ing, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is nec- essary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.

Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pres- sure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other ve- hicle fluids can damage the environ- ment. Always conform to local regula- tions for disposal of vehicle fluid.

Never leave the engine or Continu- ously Variable Transmission (CVT) re- lated component harnesses discon- nected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Never connect or disconnect the bat- tery or any transistorized compo- nent while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This Do-it-yourself section gives instruc- tions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, refer to Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information in the Technical and con- sumer information section of this manual. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

HR16DE engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Fuse box 7. Battery 8. Fuse box 9. Air cleaner 10. Engine drive belt location

LDI3471

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protec- tion. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not neces- sary.

WARNING

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to If your ve- hicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

The coolant reservoir is equipped with a pressure type coolant reser- voir cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN coolant reservoir cap.

CAUTION

Never use any cooling system addi- tives such as radiator sealer. Addi- tives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- diluted to provide antifreeze protec- tion to -34 F (-37 C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your ve- hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen- trate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol- low the coolant manufacturers in- structions to maintain minimum an- tifreeze protection to -34 F (-37 C). The use of other types of coolant so- lutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the en- gine cooling system.

The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water may re- duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional in- formation, refer to the Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level OB , add coolant up to the MAX level OA . If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to En- gine compartment check locations in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine over- heating.

WARNING

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres- sure fluid escaping from the coolant reservoir.

Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- erly. Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine temperature reaches the nor- mal operating temperature (approxi- mately 5 minutes).

3. Stop the engine.

4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain back to the oil pan.

5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way.

LDI3221 LDI3468

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-5

7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil level. It should be within the range OB .

8. If the oil level is below OA , remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil into the opening. Do not overfill OC . When filling the engine oil, do not re- move the dipstick.

9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the sever- ity of operating conditions or depending on the property of the engine oil used. More engine oil is consumed by frequent

acceleration/deceleration especially when engine rpm is high. Consumption is likely to be higher when the engine is new. if the rate of oil consumption, after driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more than 0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 km), consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insuffi- cient amount of oil can damage the en- gine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instruc- tions outlined in this section.

Vehicle set-up 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.

A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup- port points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

LDI0371

8-6 Do-it-yourself

LDI3434

O1 Oil filler cap LDI3457

O2 Oil drain plug LDI3458

O3 Oil filter

Do-it-yourself 8-7

Engine oil and filter 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug and oil filter.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and com- pletely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur- face with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket ma- terial remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage. The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten addi- tionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use exces- sive force. Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 Nm)

9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil through the oil filler opening, and in- stall the oil filler cap securely.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

For additional information about drain and refill capacity, refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual. The drain and refill ca- pacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for ref- erence only. Always use the dipstick to de- termine the proper amount of oil in the engine. 10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add en- gine oil if necessary.

After the operation 1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

2. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance re- minder (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. Check your local regulations.

CAUTION

NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equiva- lent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam- age the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recom- mended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered un- der NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information on brake fluid specification, refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual.

LDI3459

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.

Clean the filler cap before removing. Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con- tainers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the sur- face with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake fluid is below the MIN line OB , the brake warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line OA . For addi- tional information on recommended type of brake fluid, refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) comes on. To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

LDI3223

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mix- ture ratio. Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer solu- tion. This may result in damage to the paint.

Do not fill the windshield-washer reservoir with washer fluid concen- trates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concen- trates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer reservoir.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer reservoir. Do not use the windshield- washer reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

Caution symbols for battery WARNING

O1 No smoking, No exposed flames, No

Sparks Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the

battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

O2 Shield eyes Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.

O3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

O4 Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

O5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

O6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

BATTERY

8-12 Do-it-yourself

If the battery is labeled do not open it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to con- firm the batterys performance.

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of bak- ing soda and water.

Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) bat- tery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery dis- charge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat- tery power when the engine is not run- ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy- drogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not al- low battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul- furic acid can cause blindness or in- jury. After touching a battery or bat- tery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with wa- ter for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Keep battery out of the reach of children.

Do not tip the battery.

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery. This battery is not equipped with remov- able vent caps.

JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, refer to Jump starting in the In case of emergency sec- tion of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3302

Do-it-yourself 8-13

CAUTION

Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.

Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system mea- sures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage gen- erated by the generator. The current sensor OA is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your ve- hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

1. Automatic tensioner pulley 2. Generator pulley 3. Water pump pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley 5. Crankshaft pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servic- ing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

LDI3246 LDI3028

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

8-14 Do-it-yourself

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced or ad- justed. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium- tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as con- ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and sched- ules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re- move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

Do-it-yourself 8-15

WARNING

Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air, it also stops the flame if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner is not in- stalled and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be cautious working on the engine when the air cleaner is off.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, release the retaining clips OA , then release the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the unit upward OB . The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in the Maintenance and sched- ules section of this manual. When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

NOTE: After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips OA .

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the Maintenance and schedules section of this manual for change intervals. If replacement is required, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2991

AIR CLEANER

8-16 Do-it-yourself

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other mate- rial may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your wind- shield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter- gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa- ter. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol- low the procedure below: 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the

windshield.

2. Lift the release tab OA .

3. Move the wiper blade OB down and remove.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm.

5. Push the release tab down until it clicks.

6. Push wiper on to windshield.

CAUTION

After wiper blade replacement, re- turn the wiper arm to its original po- sition; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care- ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle OD . This may cause clogging or improper windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin OC .

LDI2584

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Do-it-yourself 8-17

Rear window wiper blade If checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.

Self-adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front disc-type brakes self-adjust ev- ery time the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type brakes self-adjust every time the parking brake is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is nor- mal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information re- garding brake inspections, refer to the ap- propriate maintenance schedule informa- tion in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

LDI2710

BRAKES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

If any electrical equipment does not oper- ate, check for an open fuse. Fuses are used in the passenger compart- ment and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box. When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- perage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic con- trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-

light switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

LDI2997 LDI3440

FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-19

5. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with a new fuse OB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec- trical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not oper- ate and the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links in the holder. If any of the fusible links are melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN parts. For checking and replacing the fusible links, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3232

8-20 Do-it-yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic con- trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper- ate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the left wall of the driver's side foot well, below the fuel door and hood release levers. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-

light switch are OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover OA with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam- aging the trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OB .

5. If the fuse is open OC , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OD .

6. Push the fuse box cover to install. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

LDI3087 LDI2998

Do-it-yourself 8-21

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal- low the battery or removed parts. An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always con- firm local regulations for battery disposal.

When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the components.

There is danger of explosion if the lithium battery is incorrectly re- placed. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows: 1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA

into the slit OB of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screw- driver to protect the casing.

CAUTION

To prevent damage of the Intelligent Key, do not compress the screwdriver too hard when you insert the screw- driver into the slit.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-22 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent. Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.

Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage ca- pacity.

Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with OC and OD .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

If you need assistance for replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-23

HEADLIGHTS For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped) The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halo- gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without remov- ing the headlight assembly. If headlight bulb replacement is required, It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Aiming is not necessary after replac- ing the bulb. When aiming adjust- ment is necessary, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass enve- lope. Touching the glass could sig- nificantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped) If LED headlight bulb replacement is re- quired, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions out- lined in this section.

LIGHTS

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Replacing the fog light bulb (if so equipped)

CAUTION

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.

Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart.

Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the perfor- mance of the fog light.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. Access to the fog light is in front of and behind the front tire and the fascia.

3. Remove the fasteners; carefully pull back the front fender protector.

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and pull out to remove.

5. Remove by pulling straight off the fog light. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. Do not touch the glass envelope.

6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal.

LDI3036

Do-it-yourself 8-25

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.* Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

High 65 H9 Low 55 H11 Turn/Park 27/7 3457NAK Side marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* High 65 H9 Low Turn signal 27/7 3457NAK Park Side marker 5 W5W

Fog light (Type A) (if so equipped) 35 H8 Daytime Running Light (DRL) 21 W21W

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) 35 H8 Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* Map light* 10 Room light* 8 Glove box light* 1.4 Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 5 Cargo light* 5 W5W High-mounted stop light* Rear combination light*

Turn signal 21 WY21W Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W Backup (reversing) 16 W16W

Tail light* 5 W5W License plate light 5 W5W

* If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

1. Map light 2. Room light 3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so

equipped) 4. Headlight assembly 5. Fog light (if so equipped) 6. Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so

equipped)

7. License plate light 8. High-mounted stop light 9. Tail light 10. Rear combination light

Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation

LDI3462 SDI1805

Do-it-yourself 8-27

If you have a flat tire, refer to Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely af- fect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medi- cal equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information

display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by send- ing a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). For additional information, refer to Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls sec- tion, Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem (TPMS) in the Starting and driv- ing section and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recom- mended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is af- fixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because: Most tires naturally lose air over

time. Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob- jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-28 Do-it-yourself

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, refer to TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely af- fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.

The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- tion label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle be- yond this capacity. Overload- ing your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operat- ing conditions due to prema- ture tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious ac- cident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also re- sult in failure of other vehicle components.

Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Impor- tant Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Informa- tion (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Tire and Loading Information label 1 Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

2 Vehicle load limit: For additional information, refer to Vehicle loading information in the Tech- nical and consumer information section of this manual.

3 Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the ve- hicle at the factory.

4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recom- mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide

the best balance of tire wear, ve- hicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.

5 Tire size - For additional informa- tion, refer to Tire labeling in this section.

6 Spare tire size.

LDI2007

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure 1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire. 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla- tion Pressure

Front and Rear Original Tire: P205/55R17 91V P205/60R16 92H

32 PSI, 220 kPa

Spare Tire: (Temporary) T125/90D15

60 PSI, 420 kPa

TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufac- turers to place standardized infor- mation on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and de- scribes the fundamental character- istics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

LDI0393 WDI0394 Example

Do-it-yourself 8-31

O1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 1. P: The P indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in milli- meters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This num- ber, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

4. R: The R stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num- ber is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load in- dex. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can sup- port. You may not find this infor- mation on all tires because it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

WDI0395 Example

8-32 Do-it-yourself

O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the Depart-

ment Of Transportation. The symbol can be placed above, be- low or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

O3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which in- clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth- ers.

O4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

O5 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maxi- mum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- ways use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

LDI2786 Example

Do-it-yourself 8-33

O6 Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (tube type) or not (tubeless).

O7 The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure.

O8 Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out- ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with infor- mation about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could af- fect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.

Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem to malfunction resulting in per- sonal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmis- sion and differential gears.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety In- formation (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropri- ate in some areas.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rat- ing to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- ings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, stud- ded tires may be used. However, some

states, provinces and territories prohibit their use. Check local laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry sur- faces may be poorer than that of non- studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac- cording to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufac- turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Class S chains are used on ve- hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear- ance. Vehicles that can use Class S chains are designed to meet the minimum clear- ances between the tire and the closest ve- hicle suspension or body component re- quired to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are de- termined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels. Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). For additional information on the tire replacing procedures, refer to Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 Nm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight- ened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Impor- tant Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Informa- tion (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WDI0258 WDI0259

8-36 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

Tires should be periodically in- spected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician be- cause some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible per- sonal injury.

Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious per- sonal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Impor- tant Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Informa- tion (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carry- ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad- ditional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer infor- mation section of this manual.

WARNING

The use of tires other than those rec- ommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bum- per height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could re- sult in serious personal injury.

If your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only re- placing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimen- sion. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, de- grade vehicle handling characteris- tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- terference with the brake discs/ drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimen- sions, refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer infor- mation section of this manual.

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could af- fect the proper operation of the TPMS.

The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.

When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.

Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.

Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.

Do not install a damaged or de- formed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

The use of retread tires is not recommended.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety In- formation (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in ar- eas where it is used during winter.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function. Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be re- placed with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.

Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.

Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.

Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.

Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.

Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an auto- matic car wash since it may get caught.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

MEMO

8-40 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . 9-5 Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Additional Maintenance Items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Maintenance under severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- nance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance. It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- sponsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE The maintenance items listed in this sec- tion are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- cialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through techni- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- grams. They are fully qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http:// collision.nissanusa.com. You can be confident that a NISSAN deal- er's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or mainte- nance work, closely observe the Mainte- nance precautions in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with * is found in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is re- leased. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrica- tion frequently. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and in- stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev- ery 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- hicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer- ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high- way speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other dam- age. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recom- mended that you have a damaged wind- shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked imme- diately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate prop- erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Battery*:This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situa- tions that can lead to potential bat- tery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat- tery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- ately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional infor- mation, refer to Exhaust gas (carbon mon- oxide) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- mation, rot or loose connections. Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these sub- stances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thor- oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accu- mulated. For additional information, refer to the Appearance and care section of this manual. Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service. In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day opera- tion. For additional information, refer to General maintenance in this section. Items marked with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform mainte- nance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- tervals are required. When applicable, additional information can be found in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- ing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- proved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN. For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- ties in the Technical and consumer in- formation section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE: Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belt. Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- vals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently. Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replac- ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

additional information on the proper mix- ture for your area, refer to Engine cooling system in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.) NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may re- duce the recommended service interval of the coolant. Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or re- place parts as necessary. Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE: Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam- aged parts immediately. Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex- haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently. Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) according to the in- structions under General maintenance in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec- essary. Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals. If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or re- quest the dealer to inspect the fluid dete- rioration data using a CONSULT. If the dete- rioration data is more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- nance schedules that may be used, de- pending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For most people, the odometer reading will in- dicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be per- formed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Addi- tional maintenance items should be per- formed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions: Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km). Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures re- maining below freezing.

Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic.

Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Driving in dusty conditions. Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads. Using a car-top carrier.

The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be re- quired. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

STANDARD MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers

or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 7.5 (12) 6

15 (24) 12

22.5 (36) 18

30 (48) 24

37.5 (60) 30

45 (72) 36

52.5 (84) 42

60 (96) 48

67.5 (108)

54

75 (120)

60

82.5 (132)

66

90 (144)

72

97.5 (156)

78

105 (168)

84

112.5 (180)

90

120 (192)

96 Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R R Brake fluid R R R R Brake lines and cables I I I I I I I I Brake pads and rotors, drums and linings I I I I I I I I CVT fluid NOTE (2) I I I I I I I I Drive belt NOTE (3) I* I* I* I* I* Drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I Engine coolant* NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil & oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R EVAP vapor lines & Fuel lines I* I* I* I* Exhaust system I I I I Fuel filter NOTE (6) In-cabin microfilter R R R R R R R R Intake & exhaust valve clearance* NOTE (7) NISSAN Intelligent Key battery I R R R R Spark plugs NOTE (8) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Steering gear and linkage, axle & suspension parts I I I I Tire rotation NOTE (9)

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

NOTE: Maintenance items with should be performed more frequently according to Maintenance under severe driving conditions (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (2) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) Periodic maintenance is not required. (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. (8) Replace spark plug when the spark plug gap exceeds 1.35 mm (0.053 in) even if within specific periodic replacement mileage. (9) Refer to Tire rotation under General maintenance. * Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table. SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km). Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures re- maining below freezing.

Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic.

Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Driving in dusty conditions. Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads. Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Engine oil & oil filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 18 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 30 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 36 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 42 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 54 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 60 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 66 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 72 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or 78 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 84 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or 90 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Securing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the Do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal For additional information, refer to Fuel recommendation in this section.

Engine oil*1 Drain and refill 1*: For additional information, refer to Engine oil in the Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

With oil filter change 4.1 L 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt

Genuine NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN (or equivalent) is recom- mended. If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec- ommended is not covered under NISSANs New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section.

Without oil filter change 3.8 L 4 qt 3-3/8 qt

Engine coolant with reservoir 6.95 L 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid For additional information, refer to the Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSANs New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.

Brake fluid Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.

Multi-purpose grease NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) For additional information, refer to Air conditioner system re- frigerant and oil recommendations in this section.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

Air conditioning system oil Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent For additional information, refer to Air conditioner system re- frigerant and oil recommendations in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.2 L 1 1/8 gal 7/8 gal Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An- tifreeze or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- tem or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% etha- nol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe- cifically designed for a fuel contain- ing more than 15% ethanol can ad- versely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Do not use fuel that contains the oc- tane booster methylcyclopentadi- enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may ad- versely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common ab- breviation or the appropriate per- centage for that region.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission con- trol system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gaso- line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- formulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use re- formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should con- tain no more than 15% oxygenate.

If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not avail- able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe- rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re- fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

E15 fuel E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula- tions require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percent- age for that region.

E85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- hicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- tified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Fuel containing MMT MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, in- cluding the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more de- tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active sol- vents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recom- mended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consump- tion or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your ve- hicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- cation or International Lubricant Standard- ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos- ity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals.

LTI2051

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using en- gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recom- mended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes: repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refriger- ant does not affect the earth's atmo- sphere, certain government regulations re- quire the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air condi- tioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air con- ditioner system refrigerant. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

ENGINE Model HR16DE Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6) Displacement cu in (cm 3) 97.51 (1,598) Firing order 1342 Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary. CVT in N (Neutral) position Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug DILKAR6K-11 Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm) Aluminum 17 x 6.5J 1.77 (45) Steel 16 x 6J 1.77 (45) T-type (Steel) 15 x 4T 1.18 (30) Tire size

P205/60R16 P205/55R17

Spare tire Temporary T125/90D15

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Units: in (mm) Overall length 169.1 (4,295) Overall width 69.3 (1,760) Overall height 62.5 (1,588) Track

Front 59.8 (1,520) Rear 60.4 (1,535)

Wheelbase 103.1 (2,620)

Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) For additional infor- mation, refer to the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label on the center pillar between the driv- er's side front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve- hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gaso- line vehicles must be operated with un- leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, prov- ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- tions may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into an- other country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, trans- portation and registration are the re- sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re- sponsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number) The vehicle identification number is lo- cated as shown.

LTI2050 LTI2258

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- cation label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi- cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI2469 HR16DE engine

WTI0172 LTI2268

Technical and consumer information 10-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is af- fixed as shown.

For alignment purposes, there are two marks on the bumper fascia to indicate the correct position for each screw. To install the front license plate: Use two 6 mm self-tapping screws to at- tach front license plate to bumper fascia.

NOTE:

Self-tapping screws are not supplied with vehicle.

LTI2251 LTI2233 LTI2235

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-12 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a ve- hicle. In a collision, people rid- ing in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your ve- hicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard parts, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passen- gers and cargo.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other op- tional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S. certifica- tion label.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, pas- sengers, cargo, and trailer.

Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum to- tal weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the ve- hicle. This is the maximum com- bined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is lo- cated on the Tire and Loading In- formation label.

Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information la- bel. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Ca- pacity on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label. To get the combined weight of oc- cupants and cargo, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement The com- bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX

LTI2335 Example

10-14 Technical and consumer information

lbs. or XXX kg on your vehicles Tire and Loading Information label.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For ex- ample, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail- able cargo and luggage load ca- pacity calculated in step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- firm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi- tional information, refer to Measure- ment of weights in this section. Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional informa- tion, refer to Tire and Loading Infor- mation label in this section.

SECURING THE LOAD There are luggage hooks located in the cargo area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps. When securing items using luggage hooks, do not apply a load over more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

LIC4300 Cargo area luggage hooks

Technical and consumer information 10-15

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from slid- ing or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sud- den stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could re- sult in loss of control and cause per- sonal injury.

LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of con- trol and cause personal injury.

Overloading and improper loading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicles warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the ve- hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not ex- ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These

10-16 Technical and consumer information

ratings are given on the vehicle cer- tification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.

Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.

Never tow your front wheel drive ve- hicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.

DO NOT tow any continuously vari- able transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat tow- ing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emer- gency section of this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu- ously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommenda- tions when using their product.

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 10-17

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- ity Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where appli- cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For ex- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B and C The traction grades, from highest to low- est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include ac- celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C The temperature grades are A (the high- est), B, and C, representing the tires resis- tance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor- mance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combi- nation, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- lowing emission warranties: For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na- tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- fying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a re- call and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle

safety from http:// www.safercar.gov. You may notify NISSAN by contact- ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans- port Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN. If Transport Canada receives com- plaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 10-19

You may contact Transport Cana- da's Defect Investigations and Re- calls Division toll free at 1-800-333- 0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https:// wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or https:// wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers) Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be ob- tained from Transport Canada's Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ securiteroutiere (French speakers). To notify NISSAN of any safety con- cerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800- 387-0122.

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/ Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve- hicle. If a powertrain system component is re- paired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condi- tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is not ready. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi- tion is ready. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the ready con- dition or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a ve- hicle's systems performed. The EDR is de- signed to record data related to vehicle dy- namics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- cord such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were

operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling. Sounds are not recorded. These data can help provide a better un- derstanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non- trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

10-20 Technical and consumer information

law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash in- vestigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals can also be pur- chased. For USA For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact: 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num- ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep- resentative will assist you.

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-21

MEMO

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index A

Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . .5-104 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18 Air bag warning light, supplemental. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . .4-36, 4-42 Air conditioner specification label . .10-12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Heater and air conditioner . . . . . . .4-41 Heater and air conditioner controls .4-42 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-44

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-99 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49, 4-51 AM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45 Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-53 Bluetooth audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 FM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45 iPod Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57 iPod player operation. . . . . . . . . .4-57 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44 Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63 USB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . .2-70 Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-13, 2-17, 5-60 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111, 8-12 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . .8-22

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-15 Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . .5-30 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch . . . . .2-53 Bluetooth audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 Bluetooth hands-free phone system. .4-67

Bluetooth connections . . . . . . . . .4-81 Connecting procedure. . . . . . . . . .4-72 Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71 Text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38 Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-99 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-26 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Brake wear indicators. . . . . . .2-22, 8-18 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-23 Self-adjusting brakes. . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100 Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-94 Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . .4-8 Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-12 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Child restraints. . . . . . . .1-18, 1-19, 1-21, 1-23

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25

Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-25 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Transmission shift selector lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-8

Controls Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . .4-63 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-42

Heater and air conditioner controls (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 Heater and air conditioner controls (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33

Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62

D

Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-49 Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 4-43 Rear window defroster switch . .2-44, 4-35

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-50 Display

Information display . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Display controls (see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Drive Systems OFF switch. . . . . . . . . .2-53 Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-111

Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-96 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-13, 6-2 Emission control information label . . . .10-11 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-19 Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Engine cooling system. . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-112

11-2 Index

Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-58

F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48 Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-96 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-95 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

G

Gauge Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth . .4-67 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-44 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Heater

Heater and air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-41 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-42 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-35, 4-42

Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-104 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

I

Ignition switch Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-11

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14 Important vehicle information label . . .10-11 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-96 Indicator

NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-50 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-50 Integrated Dynamics-control Module . .5-103 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . .4-17 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . . .5-92 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . .5-103 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80 Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-12 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . .5-103

Index 11-3

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 iPod Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57 ISOFIX child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

J

Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-22 Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-12

Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

L

Labels Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12 Emission control information label . .10-11 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-11 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . .5-23 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch . .2-54 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Launch bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 License plate

Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-12 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-26 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-12 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-26 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Fog light switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-44 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-44 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72

Lock Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-6 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6

Low fuel warning light. . . . . .2-15, 2-16, 2-33 Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-15 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . .2-65, 2-66 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13

M

Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4

Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 Maintenance schedules. . . . . . . . . . . .9-6 Maintenance under severe operation conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . .2-20 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Menu button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50

11-4 Index

Mirror Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Rearview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-28

N

NISSAN Anti-Theft System . . . . . .2-39, 5-14 NissanConnect Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-5 Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-11

Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-21 Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21

P

Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-96

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Phone, Bluetooth hands-free system . .4-67 Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . .5-97 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-70

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-97 Precautions

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

R

Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-67 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49 Steering wheel audio control switch. .4-63

Radio frequency remote control Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . .5-54 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-42 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . .2-36, 2-37, 2-56 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Rear sonar system OFF switch. . . . . . .2-55 Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . .5-105 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 4-43 Rear window defroster switch . . .2-44, 4-35 Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders

Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7

Index 11-5

Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 5-16 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65, 2-66

S

Safety Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-6 Child seat belts . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38 Reporting safety defects (US only). . .10-19

Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Seat belt

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-19 Injured person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10, 7-6 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-13

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-13, 2-18 Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14 Security systems

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-38 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-21 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-44 Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-16 Siri Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64 Sonar

Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-105 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Stability control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Steering Power steering system . . . . . . . . . .5-97

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-63 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-61 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18 Supplemental front impact air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48 Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . .1-61 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-42 Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Automatic power window switch . . .2-70 Fog light switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-44 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-44 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50 Power door lock switch. . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6 Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-55 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 4-43 Rear window defroster switch . .2-44, 4-35 Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

11-6 Index

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Theft (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-39 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34 Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . .10-18 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-28, 10-9 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-5 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-25 Towing

4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-18 USB/iPod Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-63 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without Navigation System) . . .4-54

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-14 Vehicle dimensions and weights. . . . . .10-9 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10

Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . .2-40, 5-14 Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . .2-23 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-13 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-14 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Voice Prompt Interrupt. . . . . . . . . . . .4-70

W

Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-13 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-14 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-14 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Low fuel warning light . . . .2-15, 2-16, 2-33 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-15 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-13, 2-18 Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-38

Index 11-7

Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-9, 2-11 Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

Weights (See dimensions and weights). .10-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28, 10-9 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68

Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-70 Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-70

Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-41

11-8 Index

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- tem or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% etha- nol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe- cifically designed for a fuel contain- ing more than 15% ethanol can ad- versely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Do not use fuel that contains the oc- tane booster methylcyclopentadi- enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may ad- versely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common ab- breviation or the appropriate per- centage for that region.

For additional information, refer to Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer informa- tion section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: For additional information, refer to Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer informa- tion section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE: Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver's door. For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For ad- ditional information, refer to Break-in schedule in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

P15-D

Printing : May 2020 Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A. OM20EM 0

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Kicks Nissan works, you can view and download the Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Nissan Kicks as well as other Nissan manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Nissan Kicks. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Nissan Kicks v5 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.